Siemens Robicon ANYBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, MODULE, P/N : A1A0000416.00M, S/N L11030002AD A5E33486415A
Siemens Robicon ANYBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, MODULE, P/N : A1A0000416.00M, S/N L11030002AD A5E33486415A
Siemens Robicon ANYBUS, PROFIBUS-DP, MODULE, P/N : A1A0000416.00M, S/N L11030002AD A5E33486415A
Siemens Medium Voltage Drive Sinamics Perfect Harmony GH180 NXGpro Communication Type 6SR Variable Frequency Drives A5E33486415A
Function Manual
https://www.robiconperfectharmony.com/
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual
AD
A5E33486415A
Security information 1
Introduction 2
Safety notes 3
Modbus Communication 4
Modbus Ethernet
Communication 5
Ethernet / IP Communication 6
Profibus Communication 7
ProfiDrive Communication 8
DeviceNet (Profile 12)
Communication 9
ControlNet Communication 10
Local HMI and Remote HMI
Interfaces 11
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs A
Output Data IDs B
Display Network Monitor C
External Modem D
Parameter Read/Write E
Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers F
Internal Drive Network G
List of abbreviations H
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Global Services Information Technology
80200 MÜNCHEN
GERMANY
A5E33486415A
Ⓟ 06/2019 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2018 - 2019.
All rights reserved
Table of contents
1 Security information....................................................................................................................................15
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................17
2.1 Communication Overview ......................................................................................................17
2.2 Remote Capabilities ...............................................................................................................20
2.3 RS232 Port.............................................................................................................................20
2.4 Optional Hardware requirement for Dual Networks ...............................................................20
2.5 Entering Parameter IDs..........................................................................................................21
3 Safety notes................................................................................................................................................23
3.1 General Safety Information ....................................................................................................23
3.2 Safety Concept.......................................................................................................................23
3.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules............................................................................................24
3.4 Safety Information and Warnings...........................................................................................25
3.5 ESD-sensitive Components ...................................................................................................27
3.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations ...................................29
4 Modbus Communication.............................................................................................................................31
4.1 Description .............................................................................................................................31
4.1.1 Network Configuration Options ..............................................................................................31
4.1.2 Siemens Modbus Module.......................................................................................................32
4.2 Software Programming ..........................................................................................................34
4.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .........................................................................................35
4.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ..................................................................................36
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing........................................................................................38
4.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.........38
4.3.2 Parameter Tables...................................................................................................................39
4.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables........................................................................................................44
4.4 Planning/Configuring..............................................................................................................49
4.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ................................................49
4.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback ...........................................................50
4.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .............................................................52
4.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP ........................52
4.4.5 Network Setup Procedure ......................................................................................................53
4.4.6 Network Status Detection Setup ............................................................................................54
4.4.7 Setup Example.......................................................................................................................55
4.5 Functions................................................................................................................................57
4.5.1 Read Coil Command (0x01)...................................................................................................57
4.5.2 Read Holding Registers Command (0x03) ............................................................................58
4.5.3 Write Multiple Coils Command (0x0F) ...................................................................................60
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 3
4.5.4 Write Single Input Register Command (0x06)........................................................................61
4.5.5 Loop Back Diagnostic Test Command (0x08)........................................................................62
4.5.6 Write Multiple Input Registers Command (0x10) ...................................................................63
5 Modbus Ethernet Communication ..............................................................................................................65
5.1 Description .............................................................................................................................65
5.1.1 Network Configuration Options ..............................................................................................66
5.1.2 Anybus Modbus Ethernet Module ..........................................................................................66
5.2 Software Programming ..........................................................................................................68
5.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .........................................................................................68
5.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the drive ...................................................................................70
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing........................................................................................71
5.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.........72
5.3.2 Parameter Tables...................................................................................................................73
5.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables........................................................................................................77
5.4 Planning/Configuring..............................................................................................................83
5.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ................................................83
5.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback ...........................................................84
5.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive .............................................................86
5.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP ........................86
5.4.5 Network Interfaces ................................................................................................................87
5.4.6 Network Setup Procedure ......................................................................................................89
5.4.7 Network Status Detection Setup ............................................................................................90
5.4.8 Setup Example.......................................................................................................................91
5.5 Functions................................................................................................................................93
5.5.1 Read Holding Registers Command (0x03) ............................................................................93
5.5.2 Write Single Input Register Command (0x06)........................................................................95
5.5.3 Write Multiple Input Registers Command (0x10) ...................................................................96
6 Ethernet / IP Communication......................................................................................................................99
6.1 AnyBus Ethernet/IP Module ...................................................................................................99
6.2 Description ...........................................................................................................................101
6.2.1 Ethernet/IP Description .......................................................................................................101
6.2.2 Network Configuration Options ............................................................................................101
6.2.3 AnyBus Ethernet/IP Module .................................................................................................102
6.3 Software Programming ........................................................................................................103
6.3.1 Flags available to the SOP ..................................................................................................103
6.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the drive .......................................................................................104
6.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive .................................................................................105
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing......................................................................................107
6.4.1 Overview: Parameter assignment/addressing ....................................................................107
6.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address ......107
6.4.3 Parameter Tables ................................................................................................................108
6.4.4 Pick List Variable Tables......................................................................................................111
6.5 Planning/Configuring............................................................................................................117
6.5.1 Overview: planning/configuring ...........................................................................................117
6.5.2 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ..............................................117
6.5.3 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback ........................................................118
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
4 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ..........................................................120
6.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP .....................120
6.5.6 Network Interfaces ..............................................................................................................121
6.5.7 PLC Setup using EDS files .................................................................................................121
6.5.8 Network Status Detection Setup ..........................................................................................122
6.5.9 Network Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................122
6.5.10 Setup Example.....................................................................................................................123
7 Profibus Communication ..........................................................................................................................127
7.1 Description ...........................................................................................................................127
7.1.1 Anybus Profibus Module ......................................................................................................128
7.2 Software Programming ........................................................................................................130
7.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .......................................................................................130
7.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ................................................................................132
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing......................................................................................133
7.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.......134
7.3.2 Parameter Tables.................................................................................................................135
7.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables......................................................................................................138
7.4 Planning/Configuring............................................................................................................144
7.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ..............................................144
7.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback .........................................................145
7.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ...........................................................147
7.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP ......................147
7.4.5 PLC Setup using GSD files ..................................................................................................148
7.4.6 Network Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................148
7.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)................................................................................................150
7.4.8 Setup Example.....................................................................................................................150
8 ProfiDrive Communication........................................................................................................................153
8.1 Description ...........................................................................................................................153
8.1.1 Anybus Profibus DP-V1 IM Module......................................................................................154
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing......................................................................................157
8.2.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.......157
8.2.2 Parameter Tables.................................................................................................................159
8.2.3 Pick List Variable Tables......................................................................................................162
8.2.4 Telegram Data Tables..........................................................................................................167
8.3 Planning/Configuring............................................................................................................172
8.3.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ..............................................173
8.3.2 PLC Setup using GSD files ..................................................................................................173
8.3.3 Network Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................174
8.3.4 Network Status (auto detect)................................................................................................175
9 DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication ....................................................................................................177
9.1 Description ...........................................................................................................................177
9.1.1 Anybus DeviceNet Module...................................................................................................178
9.2 Software Programming ........................................................................................................180
9.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .......................................................................................181
9.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ................................................................................182
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing......................................................................................184
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 5
9.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.......184
9.3.2 Parameter Tables.................................................................................................................186
9.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables......................................................................................................189
9.4 Planning/Configuring............................................................................................................195
9.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ..............................................195
9.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback .........................................................196
9.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ...........................................................198
9.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP ......................198
9.4.5 PLC Setup using EDS files ..................................................................................................199
9.4.6 Network Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................199
9.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)................................................................................................201
9.4.8 Setup Example.....................................................................................................................201
10 ControlNet Communication ......................................................................................................................203
10.1 Description ...........................................................................................................................203
10.1.1 Anybus ControlNet Module ..................................................................................................204
10.2 Software Programming ........................................................................................................205
10.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive .......................................................................................206
10.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive ................................................................................207
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing......................................................................................209
10.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address.......209
10.3.2 Parameter Tables.................................................................................................................211
10.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables......................................................................................................213
10.4 Planning/Configuring............................................................................................................219
10.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration ..............................................219
10.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback .........................................................220
10.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive ...........................................................222
10.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP ......................222
10.4.5 PLC Setup using EDS files ..................................................................................................223
10.4.6 Network Setup Procedure ....................................................................................................223
10.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)................................................................................................225
10.4.8 Setup Example.....................................................................................................................225
11 Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces ....................................................................................................227
11.1 Purpose................................................................................................................................227
11.2 Remote Connection (Anybus Network #3)...........................................................................227
11.3 Remote Connection Security ...............................................................................................228
11.4 Local Connection (CPU Ethernet)........................................................................................229
11.5 Memory Map HMI Data To Drive .........................................................................................230
11.6 Memory Map HMI Data From Drive .....................................................................................231
11.7 Memory Map DTA Data From Drive.....................................................................................231
A Menu Parameter Pick List IDs ..................................................................................................................233
A.1 Internal Analog Outputs .......................................................................................................249
A.2 Internal Test Points ..............................................................................................................250
A.3 External Analog Inputs .........................................................................................................254
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
6 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
A.4 External Analog Outputs ......................................................................................................254
A.5 Comparators ........................................................................................................................256
A.6 Historic Log Variables ..........................................................................................................257
A.7 Meter Status Variables.........................................................................................................257
A.8 To Drive Communication......................................................................................................259
A.9 From Drive Communication .................................................................................................260
B Output Data IDs........................................................................................................................................263
B.1 Output data IDs ....................................................................................................................263
C Display Network Monitor...........................................................................................................................289
D External Modem .......................................................................................................................................291
E Parameter Read/Write..............................................................................................................................293
E.1 Setting up the PTD and PFD registers.................................................................................293
E.2 Defining the PFD Registers..................................................................................................294
E.3 Defining the PTD Registers..................................................................................................295
E.4 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write ........................................................297
F Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers ............................................................................................................299
G Internal Drive Network ..............................................................................................................................301
H List of abbreviations..................................................................................................................................305
Glossary ...................................................................................................................................................311
Index.........................................................................................................................................................323
Tables
Table 4-1 Status Indicator Descriptions.......................................................................................................34
Table 4-2 Jumper to enable/disable Termination Resistor..........................................................................34
Table 4-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .........................................................................................35
Table 4-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664).................................................36
Table 4-5 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764).................................................36
Table 4-6 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ..............................................37
Table 4-7 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ..............................................37
Table 4-8 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address ........................................39
Table 4-9 Network Control Menu (9943) .....................................................................................................39
Table 4-10 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)..........................................................................................39
Table 4-11 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) .............................................................................................40
Table 4-12 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)..........................................................................40
Table 4-13 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) .....................................................................41
Table 4-14 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .........................................................................41
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 7
Table 4-15 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) .............................................................................................41
Table 4-16 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)..........................................................................42
Table 4-17 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) .....................................................................42
Table 4-18 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .........................................................................43
Table 4-19 Data from Drive Pick List Variables.............................................................................................44
Table 4-20 Data to Drive Pick List Variables.................................................................................................47
Table 4-21 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits.....................................................................................49
Table 4-22 Default definitions of General Status Bits....................................................................................51
Table 4-23 Completed Settings for Given Example ......................................................................................56
Table 4-24 Read Coils Request (TX) to Master ............................................................................................57
Table 4-25 Read Coils Response (RX) from Master.....................................................................................58
Table 4-26 Read Holding Registers Request (TX) from Master....................................................................59
Table 4-27 Read Holding Registers Response (RX) from Drive ...................................................................59
Table 4-28 Write Multiple Coils Request (TX) to Master ...............................................................................60
Table 4-29 Write Multiple Coils Response (RX) from Master........................................................................61
Table 4-30 Write Input Register Request (TX) from Master..........................................................................62
Table 4-31 Write Multiple Input Registers Request (TX) from Master ..........................................................63
Table 4-32 Write Multiple Input Registers Response (RX) from Drive ..........................................................63
Table 5-1 Status Indicator Table .................................................................................................................67
Table 5-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .........................................................................................68
Table 5-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664).................................................69
Table 5-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764).................................................69
Table 5-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ..............................................70
Table 5-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ..............................................71
Table 5-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address ........................................72
Table 5-8 Network Control Menu (9943) .....................................................................................................73
Table 5-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)..........................................................................................74
Table 5-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) .............................................................................................74
Table 5-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)..........................................................................74
Table 5-12 Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) when "Ethernet Modbus Type" (9906) is set to
"Internal CPU" 1 ..........................................................................................................................75
Table 5-13 Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu (9902) when "Ethernet Modbus Type" (9906) is set to
"Anybus Module"1,2....................................................................................................................75
Table 5-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) .....................................................................75
Table 5-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .........................................................................75
Table 5-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) .............................................................................................76
Table 5-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)..........................................................................76
Table 5-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) .....................................................................76
Table 5-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .........................................................................77
Table 5-20 Data from Drive Pick List Variables.............................................................................................77
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
8 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 5-21 Data to Drive Pick List Variables.................................................................................................81
Table 5-22 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits.....................................................................................83
Table 5-23 Default definitions of General Status Bits....................................................................................85
Table 5-24 Completed Settings for Given Example ......................................................................................92
Table 5-25 Read Holding Registers Request (TX) from Master....................................................................94
Table 5-26 Read Holding Registers Response (RX) from Drive ...................................................................94
Table 5-27 Write Input Register Request (TX) from Master..........................................................................95
Table 5-28 Write Multiple Input Registers Request (TX) from Master ..........................................................96
Table 5-29 Write Multiple Input Registers Response (RX) from Drive ..........................................................97
Table 6-1 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .......................................................................................103
Table 6-2 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)...............................................104
Table 6-3 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)...............................................105
Table 6-4 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ............................................106
Table 6-5 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ............................................106
Table 6-6 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address ......................................107
Table 6-7 Network Control Menu (9943) ...................................................................................................108
Table 6-8 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)........................................................................................108
Table 6-9 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) ...........................................................................................109
Table 6-10 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)........................................................................109
Table 6-11 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) ...................................................................109
Table 6-12 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .......................................................................110
Table 6-13 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) ...........................................................................................110
Table 6-14 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)........................................................................110
Table 6-15 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) ...................................................................111
Table 6-16 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .......................................................................111
Table 6-17 Data from Drive Pick List Variables...........................................................................................111
Table 6-18 Data to Drive Pick List Variables...............................................................................................115
Table 6-19 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................118
Table 6-20 Default definitions of General Status Bits..................................................................................119
Table 6-21 Completed Settings for Given Example ....................................................................................124
Table 7-1 Status Indicator Descriptions.....................................................................................................129
Table 7-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .......................................................................................130
Table 7-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)...............................................131
Table 7-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)...............................................131
Table 7-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ............................................132
Table 7-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ............................................133
Table 7-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Profibus Network Data .............................134
Table 7-8 Network Control Menu (9943) ...................................................................................................135
Table 7-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)........................................................................................135
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 9
Table 7-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) ...........................................................................................136
Table 7-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)........................................................................136
Table 7-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) ...................................................................136
Table 7-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .......................................................................137
Table 7-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) ...........................................................................................137
Table 7-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)........................................................................137
Table 7-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) ...................................................................138
Table 7-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .......................................................................138
Table 7-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables...........................................................................................138
Table 7-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables...............................................................................................142
Table 7-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................144
Table 7-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits..................................................................................146
Table 7-22 Completed Settings for Given Example ....................................................................................151
Table 8-1 Status Indicator Descriptions.....................................................................................................155
Table 8-2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and ProfiDrive Telegram .................................158
Table 8-3 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)........................................................................................159
Table 8-4 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) ...........................................................................................159
Table 8-5 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)........................................................................159
Table 8-6 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) ...................................................................160
Table 8-7 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .......................................................................160
Table 8-8 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) ...........................................................................................160
Table 8-9 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)........................................................................161
Table 8-10 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) ...................................................................161
Table 8-11 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .......................................................................161
Table 8-12 Data from Drive Pick List Variables...........................................................................................162
Table 8-13 Data to Drive Pick List Variables...............................................................................................165
Table 8-14 Supported ProfiDrive Telegrams...............................................................................................167
Table 8-15 Telegram 1 ................................................................................................................................167
Table 8-16 Telegram 2 ................................................................................................................................167
Table 8-17 Telegram 20 ..............................................................................................................................167
Table 8-18 Telegram 352 ............................................................................................................................168
Table 8-19 Telegram 999 ............................................................................................................................168
Table 8-20 Telegram 998 ............................................................................................................................168
Table 8-21 Data from Drive Signals ............................................................................................................169
Table 8-22 Data to Drive Signals.................................................................................................................170
Table 8-23 ZSW1 Signal: Status Bits ..........................................................................................................170
Table 8-24 STW1 Signal: Control Bits.........................................................................................................171
Table 8-25 Supported Parameters ..............................................................................................................171
Table 9-1 Status Indicator Descriptions.....................................................................................................180
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
10 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 9-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .......................................................................................181
Table 9-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)...............................................182
Table 9-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)...............................................182
Table 9-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ............................................183
Table 9-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ............................................183
Table 9-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and DeviceNet Network Data..........................185
Table 9-8 Network Control Menu (9943) ...................................................................................................186
Table 9-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)........................................................................................186
Table 9-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) ...........................................................................................186
Table 9-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)........................................................................186
Table 9-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) ...................................................................187
Table 9-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .......................................................................187
Table 9-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) ...........................................................................................188
Table 9-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)........................................................................188
Table 9-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) ...................................................................188
Table 9-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .......................................................................189
Table 9-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables...........................................................................................189
Table 9-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables...............................................................................................193
Table 9-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................195
Table 9-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits..................................................................................197
Table 9-22 Completed Settings for Given Example ....................................................................................202
Table 10-1 Status Indicator Descriptions.....................................................................................................205
Table 10-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits .......................................................................................206
Table 10-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)...............................................207
Table 10-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)...............................................207
Table 10-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464) ............................................208
Table 10-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564) ............................................208
Table 10-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and ControlNet Network Data .........................210
Table 10-8 Network Control Menu (9943) ...................................................................................................211
Table 10-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)........................................................................................211
Table 10-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900) ...........................................................................................211
Table 10-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)........................................................................211
Table 10-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400) ...................................................................212
Table 10-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600) .......................................................................212
Table 10-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914) ...........................................................................................212
Table 10-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)........................................................................213
Table 10-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500) ...................................................................213
Table 10-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700) .......................................................................213
Table 10-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables...........................................................................................213
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 11
Table 10-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables...............................................................................................217
Table 10-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits...................................................................................219
Table 10-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits..................................................................................221
Table 10-22 Completed Settings for Given Example ....................................................................................226
Table 11-1 Remote HMI Interface Parameters............................................................................................228
Table A-1 Menu Parameter Pick List IDs...................................................................................................233
Table B-1 General Data Register Assignments.........................................................................................264
Table B-2 Serial Flags ...............................................................................................................................269
Table B-3 Network Output Flags................................................................................................................269
Table B-4 WAGO™ Input and Output Flags..............................................................................................270
Table B-5 Internal Digital Inputs and Outputs............................................................................................270
Table B-6 Cell Temperature.......................................................................................................................270
Table B-7 Number of Faults and Alarms....................................................................................................272
Table B-8 Fault Word 1..............................................................................................................................272
Table B-9 Fault Word 2..............................................................................................................................275
Table B-10 Fault Word 3..............................................................................................................................276
Table B-11 Fault Word 4..............................................................................................................................277
Table B-12 Fault/Alarm Flags 1 ...................................................................................................................278
Table B-13 Fault/Alarm Flags 2 ...................................................................................................................280
Table B-14 Fault/Alarm Flags 3 ...................................................................................................................281
Table B-15 Fault/Alarm Flags 4 ...................................................................................................................282
Table B-16 Fault/Alarm Enable Flags..........................................................................................................282
Table B-17 Fatal Fault Flags........................................................................................................................283
Table B-18 Analog Input Read Registers ....................................................................................................284
Table B-19 Active Cells Read Registers......................................................................................................284
Table B-20 Cell Status.................................................................................................................................284
Table B-21 Cell Bypass Status ....................................................................................................................285
Table B-22 Performance Data .....................................................................................................................285
Table B-23 Parameter Read/Write Data......................................................................................................285
Table B-24 Parallel Drive Data ....................................................................................................................286
Table B-25 Voltage/Current Data.................................................................................................................286
Table B-26 SilcoGraph Data........................................................................................................................287
Table B-27 Shared Memory Data ................................................................................................................287
Table B-28 Internal Network Data................................................................................................................287
Table B-29 Register to Drive Manual IDs ....................................................................................................288
Table D-1 Serial Port Setup Menu (9010) ...............................................................................................291
Table E-1 Contents of PFD Registers 1 to 4..............................................................................................294
Table E-2 Contents of PTD Registers 1 to 4..............................................................................................295
Table E-3 Available ID Function Commands.............................................................................................296
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
12 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table G-1 SOP Output Flags .....................................................................................................................302
Table G-2 SOP Input Flags........................................................................................................................302
Table H-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations.................................................................................................305
Figures
Figure 2-1 NXGpro Control...........................................................................................................................19
Figure 3-1 ESD Protective Measures ...........................................................................................................28
Figure 4-1 Typical 2-wire Modbus Communication Connection ...................................................................32
Figure 4-2 Siemens Modbus Module............................................................................................................33
Figure 4-3 RS485 Pin Assignments..............................................................................................................33
Figure 5-1 Anybus Ethernet Module.............................................................................................................67
Figure 5-2 Status Indicators..........................................................................................................................67
Figure 5-3 Direct Modbus Ethernet Communication Connection .................................................................87
Figure 5-4 Network Modbus™ Ethernet Communication Connection..........................................................88
Figure 6-1 Anybus™ Ethernet Module .........................................................................................................99
Figure 6-2 Status Indicators..........................................................................................................................99
Figure 6-3 Anybus™ Ethernet Module .......................................................................................................102
Figure 6-4 Status Indicators........................................................................................................................102
Figure 6-5 Ethernet I/P Communication Connection ..................................................................................121
Figure 7-1 Anybus Profibus Module ...........................................................................................................128
Figure 7-2 Connector Pin Assignments......................................................................................................128
Figure 7-3 Rotary Switch Setting................................................................................................................129
Figure 7-4 Status Indicators........................................................................................................................129
Figure 7-5 Anybus Profibus Termination Switch in OFF position ...............................................................130
Figure 8-1 Anybus Profibus Module ...........................................................................................................154
Figure 8-2 Connector Pin Assignments......................................................................................................154
Figure 8-3 Rotary Switch Setting................................................................................................................155
Figure 8-4 Status Indicators........................................................................................................................155
Figure 8-5 Anybus Profibus Termination Switch in OFF position ...............................................................156
Figure 9-1 Anybus DeviceNet Module........................................................................................................178
Figure 9-2 Connector Pin Assignments......................................................................................................179
Figure 9-3 Status Indicators........................................................................................................................179
Figure 10-1 Anybus ControlNet Module .......................................................................................................204
Figure 10-2 Status Indicators........................................................................................................................205
Figure C-1 Display Network Monitor Function.............................................................................................289
Figure D-1 NXGpro External Modem Function Diagram.............................................................................292
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 13
Table of contents
NXGpro Communication
14 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Security information 1
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and
only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in
place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available
and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer
supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber
threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 15
Security information
NXGpro Communication
16 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Introduction 2
The NXGpro Communication manual is one component in a series of manuals intended for use
with the SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™ GH180 medium voltage drives. The SINAMICS
Perfect Harmoy™ GH180 drives maintain a common control system, the NXGpro Control. The
NXGpro Communication Manual describes the NXGpro communication hardware and the
communication protocols that can be used to enable communication to and from the drive. This
manual covers programming and configuration information for each communication protocol,
specific function descriptions and parameter assignment necessary for communication setup
and operation.
NXGpro Software Version
This manual applies to NXGpro software Version 6.7 and later. For detailed information on the
updated control software, refer to the NXG Control Manual for 6.7 software release
(A5E33474566).
2.1 Communication Overview
Each NXGpro Control System has two communication connectors that enable network
communication through a variety of communication protocols. The system supports up to two
networks.
The NXGpro Control is shipped with the necessary hardware to support Modbus™ Ethernet
network protocol connectivity. The Modbus™ Ethernet protocol does not require the addition of
an Anybus™ module.
Connectivity using other network protocols is possible with optional controller cards, called
Anybus™ modules, which plug into the fiber optic board.
Anybus™ modules are available from Siemens and support the following protocols:
● Modbus™ Ethernet
● Profibus™
● ProfiDrive™
● DeviceNet™ (Profile 12)
● ControlNet™
● Ethernet /IP
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 17
In addition to Anybus™ modules, the Modbus™ protocol is also supported.
Note
Display the type of Anybus™ modules installed in the system using parameter 'Network Module
Type' (9955).
This information may be needed to verify you have the correct module for the network interface
to be implemented.
The following figure shows the NXGpro Control and includes the locations of the connectors for
the Anybus™ modules (network 1 and 2).
Introduction
2.1 Communication Overview
NXGpro Communication
18 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
1 Network 1
2 Network 2
Figure 2-1 NXGpro Control
See also
Ethernet / IP Communication (Page 99)
Introduction
2.1 Communication Overview
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 19
2.2 Remote Capabilities
The communication interface to the drive allows remote control and monitoring of the drive.
Control of the drive can be achieved through registers or telegrams that are sent to the drive,
working in conjunction with the system program (SOP).
This allows for a range of control capabilities including:
● run request
● stop request
● fault reset
● stop
● reverse speed demand.
There are 128 remote user-programmable software flags that can be monitored and/or set
through the SOP:
● 64 programmable inputs
● 64 programmable outputs
Where applicable, refer to the Software Programming Section of a chapter for further
information.
Note
Discrete controls and user-defined control/feedback flags are configured through the drive's
built-in SOP that is provided with each drive.
2.3 RS232 Port
Use the RS232 port shown in Figure NXGpro Control to remotely monitor the drive via an
external modem. Refer to Appendix External Modem for further information.
2.4 Optional Hardware requirement for Dual Networks
The NXGpro Control supports dual networks, utilizing network 1 and network 2. To enable dual
network functionality, a protocol may require additional hardware, for example, an additional
Anybus™ module.
Refer to the Description Section of the chapter for a particular protocol where additional
hardware requirements and setup options are detailed.
Introduction
2.4 Optional Hardware requirement for Dual Networks
NXGpro Communication
20 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
2.5 Entering Parameter IDs
Throughout this manual, a four digit number inside of parentheses, for example (9403),
indicates a parameter ID number that can be entered using one of the following methods:
● the keypad located on the front of the drive
● the ToolSuite, a PC-based application software package (refer to the NXGpro ToolSuite
Manual for more information).
Use the following procedure to enter a parameter ID:
1. Press [SHIFT] + [→]. You do not need to hold down the [SHIFT] key while you press the [→]
key.
2. Enter the ID number.
Note
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for complete information on keypad
operation and entering parameter ID numbers.
Introduction
2.5 Entering Parameter IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 21
Introduction
2.5 Entering Parameter IDs
NXGpro Communication
22 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Safety notes 3
3.1 General Safety Information
Proper Use
SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™ GH180 medium voltage drives must always be installed in
closed electrical operating areas. The drive is connected to the industrial network via a circuitbreaker.
The specific transport conditions must be observed when the equipment is transported. The
equipment shall be assembled/installed and the separate cabinet units connected properly by
cable and/or busbar in accordance with the assembly/installation instructions. The relevant
instructions regarding correct storage, EMC-compliant installation, cabling, shielding and
grounding and an adequate auxiliary power supply must be strictly observed. Fault-free
operation is also dependent on careful operation and maintenance.
The power sections are designed for variable-speed drives use with synchronous and
asynchronous motors. Operating modes, overload conditions, load cycles, and ambient
conditions different to those described in this document are allowed only by special
arrangement with the manufacturer.
Commissioning should only be carried out by trained service personnel in accordance with the
commissioning instructions.
System components such as circuit-breaker, transformer, cables, cooling unit, motor, speed
sensors, etc., must be matched to VFD operation. System configuration may only be carried out
by an experienced system integrator.
3.2 Safety Concept
The medium-voltage variable frequency drive (VFD) and its components are subject to a
comprehensive safety concept which, when properly implemented, ensures safe installation,
operation, servicing, and maintenance.
The safety concept encompasses safety components and functions to protect the device and
operators.
The VFD is also equipped with monitoring functions to protect external components.
The VFD operates safely when the interlock and protection systems are functioning properly.
Nevertheless, there are areas on the medium-voltage drive that are hazardous for personnel
and that can cause material damage if the safety instructions described in this section and
throughout the product documentation are not strictly observed.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 23
3.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules
There are five safety rules that must always be observed to assure not only personal safety, but
to prevent material damage as well. Always obey safety-related labels located on the product
itself and always read and understand each safety precaution prior to operating or working on
the drive.
The five safety rules:
1. Disconnect the system.
2. Protect against reconnection.
3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized.
4. Apply grounding means.
5. Cover or enclose adjacent components that are still live.
DANGER
Danger Due to High Voltages
High voltages cause death or serious injury if the safety instructions are not observed or if the
equipment is handled incorrectly.
Potentially fatal voltages occur when this equipment is in operation which can remain present
even after the VFD is switched off.
Ensure that only qualified and trained personnel carry out work on the equipment.
Follow the five safety rules during each stage of the work.
Safety notes
3.3 Observing the Five Safety Rules
NXGpro Communication
24 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
3.4 Safety Information and Warnings
DANGER
Hazardous Voltage!
● Always follow the proper lock-out/tag-out procedures before beginning any maintenance
or troubleshooting work on the VFD.
● Always follow standard safety precautions and local codes during installation of external
wiring. The installation must follow wiring practices and insulation systems as specified in
IEC 61800-5-1.
● Hazardous voltages may still exist within the VFD cabinets even when the disconnect
switch is open (off) and the supply power is shut off.
● Only qualified individuals should install, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain this VFD. A
qualified individual is "a person, who is familiar with the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved."
● Always work with one hand, wear electrical safety gloves, wear insulated electrical hazard
rated safety shoes, and safety goggles. Also, always work with another person present.
● Always use extreme caution when handling or measuring components that are inside the
enclosure. Be careful to prevent meter leads from shorting together or from touching other
terminals.
● Use only instrumentation (e.g., meters, oscilloscopes, etc.) intended for high voltage
measurements (that is, isolation is provided inside the instrument, not provided by isolating
the chassis ground of the instrument).
● Never assume that switching off the input disconnector will remove all voltage from internal
components. Voltage is still present on the terminals of the input disconnector. Also, there
may be voltages present that are applied from other external sources.
● Never touch anything within the VFD cabinets until verifying that it is neither thermally hot
nor electrically alive.
● Never remove safety shields (marked with a HIGH VOLTAGE sign) or attempt to measure
points beneath the shields.
● Never operate the VFD with cabinet doors open. The only exception is the control cabinet.
● Never connect any grounded (i.e., non-isolated) meters or oscilloscopes to the system.
● Never connect or disconnect any meters, wiring, or printed circuit boards while the VFD is
energized.
● Never defeat the instrument’s grounding.
● When a system is configured with VFD bypass switchgear (e.g. contactors between line
and motor, and VFD and motor), these switches should be interlocked so that the line
voltage is never applied to the VFD output if the medium voltage input is removed from the
VFD.
● When a system is configured with VFD pre-charge, medium voltage is present on the
primary side of the input transformer and upstream device even though the MV contactor
is not closed.
Safety notes
3.4 Safety Information and Warnings
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 25
WARNING
Potential Arc Hazard
● Arcing can result in damage to property, serious injury and even death.
● The equipment has not been tested and rated for arc flash protection.
● Avoiding arc hazard risks is dependent upon proper installation and maintenance.
● Incorrectly applied equipment, incorrectly selected, connected or unconnected cables, or
the presence of foreign materials can cause arcing in the equipment.
● Follow all applicable precautionary rules and guidelines as used in working with medium
voltage equipment.
● The equipment may be used only:
– for the applications defined as suitable in the technical description.
– in combination with equipment and components supplied by other manufacturers which
have been approved and recommended by Siemens.
● Always follow the facility / installation site rules / guidelines for Personal Protectiive
Equipment (PPE) based on the Arc Flash study of that facility.
Additional safety precautions and warnings appear throughout this manual. These important
messages should be followed to reduce the risk of personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
Obey Rules to Avoid Risk of Death
● Always comply with local codes and requirements if disposal of failed components is
necessary.
● Always ensure the use of an even and flat truck bed to transport the VFD system. Before
unloading, be sure that the concrete pad is level for storage and permanent positioning.
● Always confirm proper tonnage ratings of cranes, cables, and hooks when lifting the VFD
system. Dropping the cabinet or lowering it too quickly could damage the unit.
● Never disconnect control power while medium voltage is energized. This could cause
severe system overheating and/or damage.
● Never store flammable material in, on, or near the drive enclosure. This includes
equipment drawings and manuals.
● Never use fork trucks to lift cabinets that are not equipped with lifting tubes. Be sure that
the fork truck tines fit the lifting tubes properly and are the appropriate length.
Safety notes
3.4 Safety Information and Warnings
NXGpro Communication
26 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
3.5 ESD-sensitive Components
Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
NOTICE
ESD Sensitive Equipment
● Always be aware of electrostatic discharge (ESD) when working near or touching
components inside the VFD cabinet. The printed circuit boards contain components that
are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Handling and servicing of components that are
sensitive to ESD should be done only by qualified personnel and only after reading and
understanding proper ESD techniques. The following ESD guidelines should be observed.
Following these rules can greatly reduce the possibility of ESD damage to printed circuit
board (PCB) components.
● Always transport static sensitive equipment in antistatic bags.
● Always use a soldering iron that has a grounded tip. Also, use either a metallic vacuumstyle plunger or copper braid when desoldering.
● Ensure that anyone handling the printed circuit boards is wearing a properly grounded
static strap. The wrist strap should be connected to ground through a 1 Megohm resistor.
Grounding kits are available commercially through most electronic wholesalers.
● Static charge build-up can be removed from a conductive object by touching the object with
a properly grounded piece of metal.
● When handling a PC board, always hold the card by its edges.
● Do not slide printed circuit boards (PCBs) across any surface (e.g., a table or work bench).
If possible, perform PCB maintenance at a workstation that has a conductive covering that
is grounded through a 1 Megohm resistor. If a conductive tabletop cover is unavailable, a
clean steel or aluminum tabletop is an excellent substitute.
● Avoid plastic Styrofoam™, vinyl and other non-conductive materials. They are excellent
static generators and do not give up their charge easily.
● When returning components to Siemens Industry, Inc. always use static-safe packing. This
limits any further component damage due to ESD.
Components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic components can be destroyed in the event of improper handling, transporting,
storage, and shipping.
Pack the electronic components in appropriate ESD packaging; e.g. ESD foam, ESD
packaging bags and ESD transport containers.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
Safety notes
3.5 ESD-sensitive Components
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 27
● Avoid physical contact with electronic components. If you need to perform absolutely
essential work on these components, then you must wear one of the following protective
gear:
– Grounded ESD wrist strap
– ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips if there is also an ESD floor.
● Do not place electronic components close to data terminals, monitors or televisions.
Maintain a minimum clearance to the screen (> 10 cm).
● Electronic components should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating
materials such as plastic foil, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of
synthetic fibers.
● Place components in contact with ESD-suited materials e.g. ESD tables, ESD surfaces,
ESD packaging.
● Measure on the components only if one of the following conditions is met:
– The measuring device is grounded with a protective conductor.
– The measuring head of a floating measuring device has been discharged directly before
the measurement.
The necessary ESD protective measures for the entire working range for electrostatically
sensitive devices are illustrated once again in the following drawings. Precise instructions for
ESD protective measures are specified in the standard DIN EN 61340-5-1.
6HDWLQJSRVLWLRQ 6WDQGLQJSRVLWLRQ 6WDQGLQJVHDWLQJSRVLWLRQ
E E D F D
I I I I I
D
F F
H
G G
H G 1 Sitting
2 Standing
3 Standing/sitting
a Conductive floor surface, only effective in conjunction with ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding
strips
b ESD furniture
c ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips are only effective in conjunction with conductive floor‐
ing
d ESD clothing
e ESD wristband
f Cabinet ground connection
Figure 3-1 ESD Protective Measures
Safety notes
3.5 ESD-sensitive Components
NXGpro Communication
28 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
3.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
WARNING
Electromagnetic fields "electro smog" when operating electrical power engineering
installations
Electromagnetic fields are generated during operation of electrical power engineering
installations.
Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, which could cause them to
malfunction. For example, the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired, potentially
leading to damage to a person's health or even death. It is therefore forbidden for persons with
heart pacemakers to enter these areas.
The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures (labels and hazard
warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk.
● Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations. For example, in
Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11
stipulated by the German statutory industrial accident insurance institution.
● Display adequate hazard warning notices on the installation.
● Place barriers around hazardous areas.
● Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source.
● Ensure personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear.
See also
Security information (Page 15)
Safety notes
3.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 29
Safety notes
3.6 Electromagnetic Fields in Electrical Power Engineering Installations
NXGpro Communication
30 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Modbus Communication 4
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a Modbus™
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
● Available functions
4.1 Description
The Modbus™ communication interface is a serial interface that operates at standard baud
rates up to 19.2 Kbaud. The 10-bit data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits (no parity) and
1 stop bit. These data parameters are fixed for the drive.
The drive always acts as a Modbus™ slave. This means that the drive does not initiate dialog
on the Modbus™ network. Rather, it listens to and then responds to the Modbus™ master (the
PLC).
Note
Only register-based read and write functions of the Modbus™ protocol are supported. These
functions are used to monitor and control analog and digital inputs and outputs of the drive.
Only the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) format of the Modbus™ protocol is supported by the
NXGpro Control.
Refer to Section Functions for function codes supported by the NXGpro Control.
See also
Functions (Page 57)
4.1.1 Network Configuration Options
This section provides information on the configuration options for the Siemens Modbus™
module for single or dual network functionality.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 31
Modbus Communication Network Connections
Modbus™ network communication is shown below.
1RWH $%GHILQLWLRQVDUHQRWVWDQGDUG,IWKHXQLWGRHVQRWZRUN
\RXPD\QHHGWRVZDS$DQG%
0D[FRQQHFWLRQV
1;*&RQWUROV 0RGEXVVODYHV
7HUPLQDWLRQ
1RWH 7KHJURXQGLVORFDWHGRQ3LQRIHDFKGULYH
1RWH 8VHWZLVWHGSDLUZLULQJLIVKLHOGHGFRQQHFWRQO\DWRQHHQG 0RGEXV0DVWHU
=
AB
B A B A A B
Figure 4-1 Typical 2-wire Modbus Communication Connection
4.1.2 Siemens Modbus Module
Description
The Siemens Modbus™ module supports Modbus™ communication. The module plugs into
the Anybus 1 (ABUS1) connector or the Anybus 2 (ABUS2) connector on the fiber optic board,
as shown in Figure NXGpro Control in the Introduction Chapter.
The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Siemens Modbus™
module.
Modbus Communication
4.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
32 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Figure 4-2 Siemens Modbus Module
Connector
The module has fixed pin assignments for Data A and Data B. The following figure shows the
output pin configuration for RS485.
1 Pin 2: Data A
2 Pin 3: Data B
3 Pin 5: Ground
Figure 4-3 RS485 Pin Assignments
Modbus Communication
4.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 33
Status Indicators
The following table explains the status indicators as shown in Figure Siemens Modbus Module.
Table 4-1 Status Indicator Descriptions
Status Indicator LED Indication
Red Module is sending data to the Modbus network
Green Module is receiving data from the Modbus network
Note
The green LED does not indicate that network traffic is present for this specific device; it only
means that network traffic is present.
Termination Resistor
The module incorporates a jumper (JP5), which can be used to terminate the network line as
listed in the following table.
Table 4-2 Jumper to enable/disable Termination Resistor
Jumper Setting
JP5 = 1-2 Termination resistor disabled
JP5 = 2-3 Termination resistor enabled
4.2 Software Programming
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
Modbus Communication
4.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
34 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 4-3 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.pro bits Modbus Address
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
40065
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
40065
4.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
Modbus Communication
4.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 35
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 4-4 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Table 4-5 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
4.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Modbus Communication
4.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
36 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 4-6 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 4-7 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
Modbus Communication
4.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 37
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
4.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses.
The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● Modbus™ Address
A digital location provided by the Modbus™ Protocol, which stores values for use by the
master (PLC) and slave (Siemens drive) devices. To establish functional communication
between the PLC and the drive via the drive's Modbus™ connection, the control software in
the drive must be configured to know what certain addresses are used for.
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
38 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 4-8 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents Modbus Address
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
40001
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) 40002
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 40003 to 40064
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
40065
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
40066
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None 40067 to 40128
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
40001
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) 40002
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 40003 to 40064
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
40065
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
40066
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None 40067 to 40128
4.3.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 4-9 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Table 4-10 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 39
Network 1 Parameters
Table 4-11 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 4-12 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Modbus Baud Rate 9060 19200 Set the Modbus network baud rate:
● 1200
● 2400
● 4800
● 9600
● 19200
Modbus Parity 9047 None Set the Modbus parity:
● none
● odd
● even
Modbus Stop Bits 9048 1 Set the Modbus stop bits:
● one
● two
Modbus Address 9070 1 1 247 Set the address of the node on the Modbus network.
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the
network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Network Timeout 9934 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐
sponsive.
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
40 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 4-13 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 4-14 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Network 2 Parameters
Table 4-15 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 41
Table 4-16 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Modbus Baud Rate 9917 19200 Set the Modbus network baud rate:
● 1200
● 2400
● 4800
● 9600
● 19200
Modbus Parity 9947 None Set the Modbus parity:
● none
● odd
● even
Modbus Stop Bits 9948 1 Set the Modbus stop bits:
● one
● two
Modbus Address 9920 1 1 247 Set the address of the node on the Modbus network.
Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the
network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Network Timeout 9935 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to be non-re‐
sponsive.
Table 4-17 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
42 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 4-18 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 43
4.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 4-19 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
44 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 45
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
46 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
Table 4-20 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 47
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
Modbus Communication
4.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
48 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
4.4 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
4.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".
2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
5. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Table 4-21 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 49
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
4.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".
2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
5. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
– 'Data from Drive 01' (9401) is read by sending the read register request in address
40001.
– 'Data from Drive 02' (9402) is read by sending the read register request in address
40002, and so on.
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
50 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 4-22 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
See also
Network Setup Procedure (Page 53)
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 51
4.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
4.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Modbus".
2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
5. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
See also
Software Programming (Page 34)
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
52 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
4.4.5 Network Setup Procedure
The Modbus™ interface is built in to all drives with NXGpro Control. It uses a dedicated serial
port. To configure the interface, configure the serial port and related operating characteristics
of the interface using the keypad or the ToolSuite drive tool.
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Modbus" and press
[ENTER]. The Modbus™ configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'Modbus Baud Rate' (9060); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'Modbus Parity' (9047) to match the parity of the PLC controller.
4. Set parameter 'Modbus Address' (9070) to the desired network address for the drive.
5. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
6. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %
7. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
8. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
9. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 53
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Software Programming (Page 34)
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (Page 38)
Parameter Tables (Page 39)
Pick List Variable Tables (Page 44)
Set flags in the SOP for drive control through a network
Ensure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:
1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following
network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in
the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;
4.4.6 Network Status Detection Setup
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
54 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status cannot be automatically detected. Instead, a "Pulse Timeout" method is
used to set the network status flags.
The "Pulse Timeout" status detection must be set up in the menu system, and has to be
“strobed” by a network device that is communicating with the drive.
Procedure for Pulse Timeout Setup
1. Pick one of the 62 selectable "Data to Drive" registers and set the pick list item to "Net Input
Pulse".
2. Set parameter 'Network Timeout' (9934) for network 1 and (9935) for network 2, in the
'Config Parameters' menu, to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0
seconds = disable timeout.
Pulse Timeout Operation
● A network device must set a unique (different) value into the "Net Input Pulse" register
before an internal timer reaches the "Network Timeout" value.
● If the network device writes a unique value, the network status flag is set to "1" and the
internal timer is reset.
● If the network device fails to write a unique value to the "Net Input Pulse" register before the
internal timer times to the value set by the "Network Timeout" parameter then the status flag
is set to "0".
4.4.7 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
To indicate general status and motor speed:
1. The table shows that:
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 55
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
To indicate output power:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output
power.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.
3. Enter parameter ID 9403.
4. Choose "output power" from the pick list.
The output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.
To indicate the number of active faults:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the
number of active faults.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.
3. Enter parameter ID 9404.
4. The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
5. Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
Since "number of active faults" is not a choice in the pick list, instead choose "Man Id"
(manual ID). The display shows "ManId-0000".
6. Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
7. Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER]. The display now shows
"ManId-3000".
The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
● If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 4-23 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (Page 38)
Modbus Communication
4.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
56 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
4.5 Functions
Supported Command Set
The NXGpro Control implements the following Modbus™ commands:
● Read coil (function code 0x01)
● Read holding registers (function code 0x03)
● Write multiple coils (function code 0x0F)
● Write single register (function code 0x06)
● Loop back diagnostic test (function code 0x08)
● Write multiple registers (function code 0x10)
Commands are issued by the Modbus™ master (PLC) and sent over the network to the
Siemens slave[s]. Commands are listed and described in the sections that follow.
4.5.1 Read Coil Command (0x01)
Description
The "read coil" command allows you to obtain the ON or OFF status of logic coils used to control
discrete outputs from the addressed slave.
Coils are numbered beginning from 0 (coil number 1 = 0, coil number 2 = 1, and so on).
Example
A sample of a "read coil" request to read coils 0020 to 0056 from a slave device number 3 and
the associated response is given below.
Read Coil Command
TX (Request) 01 01 00 13 00 25 -- --
RX (Response) 01 01 CD 6B B2 0E 1B -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Request Details
Table 4-24 Read Coils Request (TX) to Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x01 Read coils command
Start address of coils to read (high) 0x00 Start address is coil number 20
Start address of coils to read (low) 0x13
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 57
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Number of coils to read (high) 0x00 Read 37 coils starting from coil 20
Number of coils to read (low) 0x25
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Response Details
Table 4-25 Read Coils Response (RX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x01 Read coils command
Data from coils 0xCD Decoded data from coils*
Data from coils 0x6B
Data from coils 0x02
Data from coils 0x0E
Data from coils 0x1B Decoded data, high bits are filled with
zeros if no data requested
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
*The response includes data that is decoded as follows:
● Data is packed with 1 bit for each coil (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
● The low order bit of the first character contains the addressed coil. The remainder bits follow.
● For coil quantities that are not even multiples of 8, the last characters are filled in with zeros
at high order end.
● The status of coils 20-27 is shown as CD (HEX) = 1100 1101 (binary). Reading left to right,
this shows that coils 27, 26, 23, 22, and 20 are all on. The other coil data bytes are decoded
similarly.
● Due to the quantity of coil statuses requested, the last data field, shown as 1B (HEX) = 001
1011 (binary), contains the status of only 5 coils (52-56) instead of 8 coils. The 3 left-most
bits are provided as zeros to fill the 8-bit format.
4.5.2 Read Holding Registers Command (0x03)
Description
The "read holding registers" command allows the Modbus master to read up to 64 consecutive
memory registers from the drive.
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
58 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Example
A sample of a "read holding registers" request to read 2 registers (40005 and 40006) and the
associated response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Read Holding Registers Command
TX (Request) 01 03 00 04 00 02 -- --
RX (Response) 01 03 04 04 A5 90 B1 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Request Details
Table 4-26 Read Holding Registers Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x03 Read holding registers command
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40005
Starting Address (low) 0x04
Number of Registers to Read (high) 0x00 Read 2 (0x0002) registers
Number of Registers to Read (low) 0x02
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Response Details
Table 4-27 Read Holding Registers Response (RX) from Drive
Field Name Value (in Hex) Actual Result Scaled Value Description
Slave Address 0x01 N/A N/A 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x03 N/A N/A Read holding registers
command
Byte Count 0x04 N/A N/A 4 bytes in response
Data Value 1 (MSB) 0x04 0x04A5 This register is user program‐
mable. See Table Register Da‐
ta from Drive Menu (9400).
High byte of item 1
Data Value 1 (LSB) 0xA5 Low byte of item 1
Data Value 2 (MSB) 0x90 0x90B1 High byte of item 2
Data Value 2 (LSB) 0xB1 Low byte of item 2
CRC byte 1 --- N/A N/A Byte 1 for this mes‐
sage
CRC byte 2 --- N/A N/A Byte 2 for this mes‐
sage
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 59
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
Note
For responses received from the drive such as in Table Read Holding Registers Response
(RX) from Drive , the keypad parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) is set to "Percent" by default.
Scaled values differ depending on how this parameter is configured. This is described in
Table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in Section Parameter assignment/addressing.
Refer to Table General Data Register Assignments in Appendix Output Data IDs for data
scaling.
4.5.3 Write Multiple Coils Command (0x0F)
Description
The "write multiple coils" command forces multiple coils in a consecutive block to a desired ON
or OFF state. Any coil that exists within the controller can be forced to either state. The
controller can also alter the state of the coil.
Coils are numbered beginning from 0 (coil number 1 = 0, coil number 2 = 1, and so on).
Example
A sample of a "write multiple coils" request to force a slave device number 1 to write 10 coils
starting at address 20 (13 HEX), and the associated response is given below.
Write Multiple Coils Command
TX (Request) 01 0F 00 13 00 0A 02 CD 00 -- --
RX (Response) 01 0F 00 13 00 0A -- --
The 2 data fields, CD = 1100 and 00 = 000 0000, indicate that coils 27, 26, 23, 22, and 20 are
to be forced on.
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Request Details
Table 4-28 Write Multiple Coils Request (TX) to Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x0F Write multiple coils command
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
60 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Start address of coils to write (high) 0x00 Start address is coil number 20
Start address of coils to write (low) 0x13
Number of coils to write (high) 0x00 Write 10 coils starting from coil 20
Number of coils to write (low) 0x0A
Byte count 0x02 2 bytes total
Data to write coils 20 - 27 0xCD
Data to write coils 28 – 29 0x00
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Response Details
Table 4-29 Write Multiple Coils Response (RX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x0F Write multiple coils command
Start address of coils to write (high) 0x00 Start address is coil number 20
Start address of coils to write (low) 0x13
Number of coils to write (high) 0x00 Write 10 coils starting from coil 20
Number of coils to write (LOW) 0x0A
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
4.5.4 Write Single Input Register Command (0x06)
Description
The "write input register" command allows the Modbus master to write a value to a specified
input register in the drive.
Example
A sample of a "write input register" request to write a value to register 40067 and the associated
response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Write Input Register Command
TX (Request) 01 06 00 42 00 64 -- --
RX (Response) 01 06 00 42 00 64 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following table.
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 61
Request Details
Table 4-30 Write Input Register Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Notes
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x06 Write input register command
Register Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40067
Register Address (low) 0x42
Preset Data (high) 0x00 Value = 100
Preset Data (low) 0x64
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Response Details
The write input register response (RX) from the drive is an echo of the request and therefore is
identical; refer to table above.
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
4.5.5 Loop Back Diagnostic Test Command (0x08)
Description
The "loop back test" command allows the Modbus master to test the communication link to the
drive.
Example
A sample of a "loop back test" request and the associated response, in hexadecimal, is given
below.
Loop Back Test Command
TX (Request) 01 08 00 00 03 E8 -- --
RX (Response) 01 08 00 00 03 E8 -- --
The loop back test response (RX) from the drive is an echo of the request and therefore is
identical.
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
62 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
4.5.6 Write Multiple Input Registers Command (0x10)
Description
The "write multiple input registers" command allows the Modbusmaster to write up to 64 values
(in a single command) to multiple input registers in the drive.
Example
A sample of a "write multiple input registers" command to write to 2 registers and the
associated response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Write Multiple Input Registers Command
TX (Request) 01 10 00 43 00 02 04 00 64 24 E3 -- --
RX (Response) 01 10 00 43 00 02 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Request Details
Table 4-31 Write Multiple Input Registers Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x10 Write multiple input registers command
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40068
Starting Address (low) 0x43
Number of Registers (high) 0x00 Write to 0x0002 (2) registers
Number of Registers (low) 0x02
Byte Count 0x04 4 bytes total
Preset Data 1 (high) 0x00 Value = 0x0064 (100 decimal)
Preset Data 1 (low) 0x64
Preset Data 2 (high) 0x24 Value = 0x24E3 (9443 decimal)
Preset Data 2 (low) 0xE3
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Response Details
Table 4-32 Write Multiple Input Registers Response (RX) from Drive
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x10 Write multiple input registers command
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 63
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40068
Starting Address (low) 0x43
Number of Registers (high) 0x00 Write to 0x0002 (2) registers
Number of Registers (low) 0x02
Error Check (CRC) byte 1 — Byte 1 of CRC for this message
Error Check (CRC) byte 2 — Byte 2 of CRC for this message
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
Modbus Communication
4.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
64 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Modbus Ethernet Communication 5
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over an Modbus™
Ethernet network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
● Available functions
5.1 Description
The Modbus™ Ethernet communication interface is based on the TCP/IP protocol. All
addressing is based on IP addresses.
The drive always acts as a Modbus™ slave. This means that the drive does not initiate dialog
on the Modbus™ Ethernet network. Rather, it listens to and then responds to the Modbus™
Ethernet master.
Note
Only register-based read and write functions of the Modbus™ protocol are supported. These
functions are used to monitor and control analog and digital inputs and outputs of the drive.
Only the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) format of the Modbus™ protocol is supported by the
NXGpro Control. All requests are sent via register port 502.
Refer to Section Functions for function codes supported by the NXGpro Control.
To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.
See also
Functions (Page 93)
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 65
5.1.1 Network Configuration Options
This section provides information on the configuration options for the Anybus™ Ethernet
Modbus™module for dual network functionality.
● Network 1 communication can be supported by two methods, which are as follows:
– CPU: Ethernet Modbus™ communication is only valid for NXpro software version 6.1
and earlier and is supported via the NXGpro CPU Ethernet connection
– Anybus™ Ethernet module ethernet communication is supported via an Anybus™
Ethernet module connected to the Network 1 connector of the NXGpro control. The
benefit of this method is that the CPU of the drive cannot experience any interrupt or
associated issues.
● Network 2 communication is supported via an Anybus™ Ethernet module as described in
the following section.
Note
The CPU Ethernet connection will only support Ethernet Modbus™ for Network for NXGpro
software version 6.1 and earlier. It cannot be used for Network 2.
5.1.2 Anybus Modbus Ethernet Module
Description
Note
Network Usage
The Anybus™ Ethernet module is the only hardware that can be used for Network 2 .
The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Modbus™
Ethernet module. The DIP switches are not used for the NXGpro application.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
66 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
1 RJ-45 connector
2 DIP switches (not used)
3 Status indicators
Figure 5-1 Anybus Ethernet Module
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 5-2 Status Indicators
.Refer to Table Status Indicator Table to view explanation of the various status indicators
Table 5-1 Status Indicator Table
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Link present On The module has a link.
Off The module does not sense a link.
2 Module status Off No power applied to the module.
Green The module is operating correctly.
Green, flashing The module has not been configured.
Red A major internal error has been detected.
Red, flashing A minor recoverable fault has been detected.
Green / red flashing The module is performing a power-on self-test.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 67
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
3 Network status Flashing Number of flashes = number of established Modbus/TCP
connections to the module
4 Data activity Flashing A packet is being received or transmitted.
5.2 Software Programming
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 5-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.pro bits Modbus Address
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) CPU
(only valid on NXGpro software version 6.1 and
earlier)
Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
40065 or 41025
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Anybus Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
41025
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
41025
5.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
68 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 5-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Table 5-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 69
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
5.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 5-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
70 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 5-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 71
5.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses.
The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● Modbus™ Address
A digital location provided by the Modbus™ Protocol, which stores values for use by the
master (PLC) and slave (Siemens drive) devices. To establish functional communication
between the PLC and the drive via the drive's Modbus™ connection, the control software in
the drive must be configured to know what certain addresses are used for.
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
– Network 1 Data to drive can use either listed register range. There are 2 ranges available
to allow compatibility with the Anybus™ module on Network 2, and remain backward
compatible with the Modbus™ Ethernet implementation.
Table 5-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents Modbus Address
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status
(not changeable)
40001
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed
(not changeable)
40002
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 40003 to 40064
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register
Bits
(not changeable)
When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Internal CPU" and NXGpro
software version 6.1 and earlier is used:
40065
When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Anybus Module" or NXGpro
software 6.2 or later is used: 41025
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
72 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents Modbus Address
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand
(not changeable)
When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Internal CPU" and NXGpro
software version 6.1 and earlier is
used:40066
When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Anybus Module" or NXGpro
software 6.2 or later is used: 41026
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Internal CPU" and NXGpro
software version 6.1 and earlier is used:
40067 to 40128
When parameter "Ethernet Modbus Type"
(9906) is set to "Anybus Module" or NXGpro
software 6.2 or later is used:
41027 to 41088
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status
(not changeable)
40001
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed
(not changeable)
40002
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None 40003 to 40064
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register
Bits (not change‐
able)
41025
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand
(not changeable)
41026
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None 41027 to 41088
5.3.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 5-8 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 SOP Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 73
Table 5-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Network 1 Parameters
Table 5-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Ethernet Modbus
Type
(only valid for
NXGpro software
version 6.1 and ear‐
lier)
9906 Internal
(CPU)
Select the type of Modbus Ethernet connection to the
drive:
● Internal (CPU)
● Anybus Module
Table 5-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from
the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand
reference from the network.
Network Timeout 9934 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to
be non-responsive.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
74 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 5-12 Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) when "Ethernet Modbus Type" (9906) is set to "Internal CPU" 1
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
IP Address 9310 172.16.20.16 Set the system TCP/IP address.
Subnet Mask 9320 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.
Gateway Address 9330 172.16.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.
1 Only valid for NXGpro software version 6.1 and earlier
Table 5-13 Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu (9902) when "Ethernet Modbus Type" (9906) is set to "Anybus Module"1,2
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
IP Address 9960 172.16.20.18 Set the system TCP/IP address.
Subnet Mask 9961 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.
Gateway Address 9962 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.
1 NXGpro software version 6.1 and earlier uses this table or the preceeding table specifiying TCP/IP parameters.
2 NXGpro software version 6.2 and greater uses only this table.
Table 5-14 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 5-15 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 75
Network 2 Parameters
Table 5-16 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 5-17 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values
from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand
reference from the network.
Network Timeout 9935 0 0 65535 Set the timeout for network determined to
be non-responsive.
IP Address 9936 172.16.20.17 Set the system TCP/IP address.
Subnet Mask 9937 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.
Gateway Address 9938 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.
Table 5-18 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
76 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 5-19 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
5.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 5-20 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 77
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
78 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 79
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
80 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 5-21 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 81
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
82 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
5.4 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● Network interfaces
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
5.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address' . Refer
to Tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu
located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the
'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGpro software version and
hardware configuration.
3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to Tables
titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1 : TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the
previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on
the NXGpro software version and hardware configuation.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
5. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Table 5-22 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 83
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
5.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address' . Refer
to Tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu
located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the
'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGpro software version and
hardware configuration.
3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to Tables
titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1 : TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the
previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on
the NXGpro software version and hardware configuation.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
84 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
5. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
– 'Data from Drive 01' (9401) is read by sending the read register request in address
40001.
– 'Data from Drive 02' (9402) is read by sending the read register request in address
40002, and so on.
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 5-23 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 85
5.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
5.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet mask' and 'Gateway address' . Refer
to Tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu
located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the
'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGpro software version and
hardware configuration.
3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to Tables
titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1: TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the
previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on
the NXGpro software version and hardware configuation.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
86 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
5. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
See also
Software Programming (Page 68)
5.4.5 Network Interfaces
The NXGpro Control is equipped with a high performance 32-bit Ethernet chipset which is fully
compliant with IEEE 802.3 100 MBPS CSMA/CD standards.
● It uses a dedicated standard RJ-45 port located on the front of the CPU board that supports
Network 1.
● The Anybus™ Modbus™ Ethernet module uses a standard RJ-45 port located on the
module to support Network 2.
Possible configurations for Ethernet communication between an Modbus™ Ethernet device
and the NXGpro Control software are described below. Choose a configuration based on the
site infrastructure.
Direct Ethernet Connection
Direct connection is intended for a single Modbus™ Ethernet device that is connected to the
drive using an Ethernet crossover cable. This cable allows direct connection to the drive without
a hub or server.
(WKHUQHW0RGEXV'HYLFH
&URVVRYHUFDEOH
DQGFRXSOHU
1;*SUR&RQWURO
Figure 5-3 Direct Modbus Ethernet Communication Connection
The following hardware is required for this connection method:
● Crossover patch cable
● Coupler
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 87
Multiple Drive LAN Ethernet Connection
To use the LAN connection to control one or more drives on an existing network complete the
following steps:
● Assign a unique IP address to each drive.
● Set the menu items of the TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) for each drive.
● For Network 1, set the following menu items based on the settings unique to the network.
Verify the network settings for the parameters 'IP Address", 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway
Address'. Refer to Tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 1 : TCIP/IP
Setup Menu located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for
"IP Address', 'Subnet Mask' and the 'Gateway Address' based on the NXGpro software
version and hardware configuration.
● For Network 2, set the following menu items based on the settings unique to the network:
– IP Address (9336)
– Subnet Mask (9337)
– Gateway Address (9338)
Refer to Table Network 2 Configure Parameters Menu (9916) in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing of this chapter.
(WKHUQHW,3'HYLFH +XE
1;*SUR&RQWURO
1;*SUR&RQWURO
Figure 5-4 Network Modbus™ Ethernet Communication Connection
The following hardware is required for this connection method:
● EtherFast 10/100 hub
● Ethernet Cat5 cable
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
88 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
5.4.6 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Ethernet/IP" and press
[ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
3. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x command speed where –125 % to 125 %
4. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
5. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
6. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 89
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
Software Programming (Page 103)
Set flags in the SOP for drive control through a network
Ensure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:
1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following
network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in
the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;
5.4.7 Network Status Detection Setup
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
90 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The network status cannot be automatically detected. Instead, a "Pulse Timeout" method is
used to set the network status flags.
The "Pulse Timeout" status detection must be set up in the menu system, and has to be
“strobed” by a network device that is communicating with the drive.
Procedure for Pulse Timeout Setup
1. Pick one of the 62 selectable "Data to Drive" registers and set the pick list item to "Net Input
Pulse".
2. Set parameter 'Network Timeout' (9934) for network 1 and (9935) for network 2, in the
'Config Parameters' menu, to a value (in seconds) to activate the network timeout. 0
seconds = disable timeout.
Pulse Timeout Operation
● A network device must set a unique (different) value into the "Net Input Pulse" register
before an internal timer reaches the "Network Timeout" value.
● If the network device writes a unique value, the network status flag is set to "1" and the
internal timer is reset.
● If the network device fails to write a unique value to the "Net Input Pulse" register before the
internal timer times to the value set by the "Network Timeout" parameter then the status flag
is set to "0".
5.4.8 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
To indicate general status and motor speed:
1. The table shows that:
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 91
To indicate output power:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output
power.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.
3. Enter parameter ID 9403.
4. Choose "output power" from the pick list.
The output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.
To indicate the number of active faults:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the
number of active faults.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.
3. Enter parameter ID 9404.
4. The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
5. Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
Since "number of active faults" is not a choice in the pick list, instead choose "Man Id"
(manual ID). The display shows "ManId-0000".
6. Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
7. Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER]. The display now shows
"ManId-3000".
The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
● If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 5-24 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address (Page 72)
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
92 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
5.5 Functions
Supported Command Set
The NXGpro Control implements the following Modbus™ commands:
● Read holding registers (function code 0x03)
● Write single register (function code 0x06)
● Write multiple registers (function code 0x10)
Commands are issued by the Modbus™ master (PLC) and sent over the network to the
Siemens slave[s]. The request and response message prefix for all codes is a 6 byte prefix, as
defined in the following table.
Definition of Byte Number
Transaction identifier usually 0 (copied by server)
Transaction identifier usually 0 (copied by server)
Protocol identifier 0
Protocol identifier 0
Length field (upper byte) 0 (all messages are less than 256 bytes)
Length field (lower byte) number of bytes to follow
Commands are listed and described in the sections that follow.
5.5.1 Read Holding Registers Command (0x03)
Description
The "read holding registers" command allows the Modbus master to read up to 64 consecutive
memory registers from the drive.
Example
A sample of a "read holding registers" request to read 2 registers (40005 and 40006) and the
associated response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Read Holding Registers Command
TX (Request) 01 03 00 04 00 02 -- --
RX (Response) 01 03 04 04 A5 90 B1 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 93
Request Details
Table 5-25 Read Holding Registers Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x03 Read holding registers command
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40005
Starting Address (low) 0x04
Number of Registers to Read (high) 0x00 Read 2 (0x0002) registers
Number of Registers to Read (low) 0x02
Response Details
Table 5-26 Read Holding Registers Response (RX) from Drive
Field Name Value (in Hex) Actual Result Scaled Value Description
Transaction identifier 0
Transaction identifier 0
Protocol identifier 0
Protocol identifier 0
Length field (upper
byte)
0
Length field (lower
byte)
Number of bytes to
follow
Slave Address 0x01 N/A N/A 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x03 N/A N/A Read holding registers
command
Byte Count 0x04 N/A N/A 4 bytes in response
Data Value 1 (MSB) 0x04 0x04A5 This register is user program‐
mable. See Table Register Da‐
ta from Drive Menu (9400).
High byte of item 1
Data Value 1 (LSB) 0xA5 Low byte of item 1
Data Value 2 (MSB) 0x90 0x90B1 High byte of item 2
Data Value 2 (LSB) 0xB1 Low byte of item 2
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
94 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Note
For responses received from the drive such as in Table Read Holding Registers Response
(RX) from Drive , the keypad parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) is set to "Percent" by default.
Scaled values differ depending on how this parameter is configured. This is described in
Table Configure Parameters Menu (9902) in Section Parameter assignment/addressing.
Refer to Table General Data Register Assignments in Appendix Output Data IDs for data
scaling.
5.5.2 Write Single Input Register Command (0x06)
Description
The "write input register" command allows the Modbus master to write a value to a specified
input register in the drive.
Example
A sample of a "write input register" request to write a value to register 40067 and the associated
response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Write Input Register Command
TX (Request) 01 06 00 42 00 64 -- --
RX (Response) 01 06 00 42 00 64 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following table.
Request Details
Table 5-27 Write Input Register Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Notes
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x06 Write input register command
Register Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40067
Register Address (low) 0x42
Preset Data (high) 0x00 Value = 100
Preset Data (low) 0x64
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 95
Response Details
The write input register response (RX) from the drive is an echo of the request and therefore is
identical; refer to table above.
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
5.5.3 Write Multiple Input Registers Command (0x10)
Description
The "write multiple input registers" command allows the Modbusmaster to write up to 64 values
(in a single command) to multiple input registers in the drive.
Example
A sample of a "write multiple input registers" command to write to 2 registers and the
associated response, in hexadecimal, is given below.
Write Multiple Input Registers Command
TX (Request) 01 10 00 43 00 02 04 00 64 24 E3 -- --
RX (Response) 01 10 00 43 00 02 -- --
The meaning of the sample request and associated response is detailed in the following tables.
Request Details
Table 5-28 Write Multiple Input Registers Request (TX) from Master
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x10 Write multiple input registers command
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40068
Starting Address (low) 0x43
Number of Registers (high) 0x00 Write to 0x0002 (2) registers
Number of Registers (low) 0x02
Byte Count 0x04 4 bytes total
Preset Data 1 (high) 0x00 Value = 0x0064 (100 decimal)
Preset Data 1 (low) 0x64
Preset Data 2 (high) 0x24 Value = 0x24E3 (9443 decimal)
Preset Data 2 (low) 0xE3
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
96 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Response Details
Table 5-29 Write Multiple Input Registers Response (RX) from Drive
Field Name Value (in Hex) Description
Slave Address 0x01 0x01 = 1 decimal
Function 0x10 Write multiple input registers command
Starting Address (high) 0x00 Register number 40068
Starting Address (low) 0x43
Number of Registers (high) 0x00 Write to 0x0002 (2) registers
Number of Registers (low) 0x02
Note
Parameter names and their corresponding data ID numbers are listed in Appendix Output Data
IDs.
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 97
Modbus Ethernet Communication
5.5 Functions
NXGpro Communication
98 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Ethernet / IP Communication 6
6.1 AnyBus Ethernet/IP Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Ethernet/IP
module. The DIP switches are not used for the NXGpro application.
1 RJ-45 connector
2 DIP switches (not used)
3 Status indicators
Figure 6-1 Anybus™ Ethernet Module
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 6-2 Status Indicators
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 99
The table explains the status indicators.
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Link present On The module has a link.
Off The module does not sense a link.
2 Module status Off No power applied to the module.
Green The module is operating correctly.
Green, flashing The module has not been configured.
Red A major internal error has been detected.
Red, flashing A minor recoverable fault has been detected.
Green / red flashing The module is performing a power-on self-test.
3 Network status Green The module has at least one Ethernet/IP connection.
Green Flashing There are no Ethernet/IP connections established.
4 Data activity Flashing A packet is being received or transmitted.
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over an Ethernet / IP
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
● Available functions
Note
Only use the Ethernet maintenance connection for maintenance work done at the drive
location. Maintenace must be performed by qualified and trusted personnel.
See also
Safety Information and Warnings (Page 25)
Observing the Five Safety Rules (Page 24)
Security information (Page 15)
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.1 AnyBus Ethernet/IP Module
NXGpro Communication
100 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6.2 Description
6.2.1 Ethernet/IP Description
The following information provides an overview of the Anybus™ Ethernet module which:
● acts as a Group 2 and 3 server on an Ethernet/IP network. Ethernet I/P is based on the
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP)
● is configured as a communication adapter (Profile 12).
● uses Assembly #150 for O→T data (data sent to the NXGpro Control)
● uses Assembly #100 for T→O data (data sent from the NXGpro Control)
● supports input and output data sizes of 2 to 128 bytes
● has an RJ45 for connection to a network
To enable dual functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.
6.2.2 Network Configuration Options
This section provides information on the configuration options for the fiber optic board and the
Anybus™ Ethernet module for dual network functionality.
● Network 1 communication is supported via an Anybus™ module as described in the
following section.
● Network 2 communication is supported via an Anybus™ module as described in the
following section.
Note
The CPU Ethernet connection does not support Ethernet/IP communication.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.2 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 101
6.2.3 AnyBus Ethernet/IP Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector and status indicators on the Anybus™ Ethernet/IP
module. The DIP switches are not used for the NXGpro application.
1 RJ-45 connector
2 DIP switches (not used)
3 Status indicators
Figure 6-3 Anybus™ Ethernet Module
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 6-4 Status Indicators
The table explains the status indicators.
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Link present On The module has a link.
Off The module does not sense a link.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.2 Description
NXGpro Communication
102 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
2 Module status Off No power applied to the module.
Green The module is operating correctly.
Green, flashing The module has not been configured.
Red A major internal error has been detected.
Red, flashing A minor recoverable fault has been detected.
Green / red flashing The module is performing a power-on self-test.
3 Network status Green The module has at least one Ethernet/IP connection.
Green Flashing There are no Ethernet/IP connections established.
4 Data activity Flashing A packet is being received or transmitted.
6.3 Software Programming
6.3.1 Flags available to the SOP
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 6-1 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Corresponding Drctry.pro bits
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) CPU Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Anybus Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.3 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 103
6.3.2 Programmable Inputs to the drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 6-2 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.3 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
104 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 6-3 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
6.3.3 Programmable Outputs from the drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.3 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 105
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 6-4 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 6-5 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Modbus network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.3 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
106 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
6.4.1 Overview: Parameter assignment/addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables (with scaling and range)
6.4.2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Modbus™ addresses.
The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Table 6-6 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Modbus Address
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changeable)
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable)
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable)
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 107
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changeable)
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable)
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not changeable)
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not changeable)
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None
See also
Network Setup Procedure (Page 122)
6.4.3 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 6-7 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Table 6-8 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
108 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Network 1 Parameters
Table 6-9 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 6-10 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from
the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand
reference from the network.
IP Address 9960 172.16.20.18 Set the system TCP/IP address.
Subnet Mask 9961 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.
Gateway Address 9962 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.
Table 6-11 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 109
Table 6-12 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Network 2 Parameters
Table 6-13 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 6-14 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9924 Designate the units for velocity values
from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand
reference from the network.
IP Address 9936 172.16.20.17 Set the system TCP/IP address.
Subnet Mask 9937 255.255.0.0 Set the system TCP/IP subnet mask.
Gateway Address 9938 172.17.1.1 Set the system TCP/IP gateway address.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
110 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 6-15 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 6-16 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
See also
Network Interfaces (Page 121)
Network Setup Procedure (Page 122)
6.4.4 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 6-17 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 111
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
112 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 113
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
114 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 6-18 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 115
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.4 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
116 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6.5 Planning/Configuring
6.5.1 Overview: planning/configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● Network interfaces
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
6.5.2 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet Mask' and 'Gateway Address' . Refer
to Tables titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 2: TCIP/IP Setup Menu
located in the previous section of this chapter to find the parameter numbers for the
'Gateway Address' and the 'Subnet Mask' based on the NXGpro software version and
hardware configuration.
3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. Refer to Tables
titled Network 1: TCP/IP Setup Menu. and Network 2 : TCIP/IP Setup Menu located in the
previous section of this chapter to find the parameter number for the 'IP Address' based on
the NXGpro software version and hardware configuation.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
5. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 117
Table 6-19 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
6.5.3 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet mask' (9961) and 'Gateway address'
(9962). The default subnet mask and gateway address work for most network
configurations.
3. Set parameter 'IP Address' (9960). The IP address must be unique to the drive.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
118 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
5. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
– 'Data from Drive 01' (9401) is read by sending the read register request in address
40001.
– 'Data from Drive 02' (9402) is read by sending the read register request in address
40002, and so on.
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 6-20 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 119
6.5.4 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
6.5.5 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Ethernet Modbus". This setup assumes that an
existing working TCP/IP network is established.
2. Verify the network settings for the parameters 'Subnet mask' and 'Gateway address'. When
using Network 1 refer to Table Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902). When using
Network 2, refer to Table Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916).
3. Set parameter 'IP Address'. The IP address must be unique to the drive. When using
Network 1 refer to Table Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902). When using
Network 2, refer to Table Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916).
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
5. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
120 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6.5.6 Network Interfaces
● The Anybus™ Ethernet/IP module uses a standard RJ-45 port located on the module to
support Network 1.
● The Anybus™ Ethernet/IP module uses a standard RJ-45 port located on the module to
support Network 2.
Multiple Drive LAN Ethernet Connection
To use the LAN connection to control one or more drives on an existing network complete the
following steps:
● Assign a unique IP address to each drive.
● Set the menu items of the TCP/IP Setup Menu (9300) for each drive.
● For Network 1, set the following menu items based on the settings unique to the network:
– IP Address (9960)
– Subnet Mask (9961)
– Gateway Address (9962)
● For Network 2, set the following menu items based on the settings unique to the network:
– IP Address (9336)
– Subnet Mask (9337)
– Gateway Address (9338)
Refer to Table Network 2 Configure Parameters Menu (9916) in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing of this chapter.
(WKHUQHW,3'HYLFH +XE
1;*SUR&RQWURO
1;*SUR&RQWURO
Figure 6-5 Ethernet I/P Communication Connection
The following hardware is required for this connection method:
● EtherFast 10/100 hub
● Ethernet Cat5 cable
6.5.7 PLC Setup using EDS files
An EDS file is a device description file in a specified format.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 121
Contact Siemens customer service for EDS files.
6.5.8 Network Status Detection Setup
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status is automatically detected. The detection time takes approximately 20 -
40 milliseconds. If a longer time-out period is desired for a network that automatically detects
the network status, it must be implented through SOP Logic.
6.5.9 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Ethernet/IP" and press
[ENTER]. The configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
3. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x command speed where –125 % to 125 %
4. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
122 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
5. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available addresses with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed addresses, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
6. Define the bits in the available addresses using one of the following methods:
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
Software Programming (Page 103)
6.5.10 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 123
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
General status and motor speed indication:
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
Output power indication:
● 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output power.
● Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403 by referring to
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address .
● Enter parameter ID 9403.
● Choose "output power" from the pick list. The output power will be sent to the PLC using
register 'Data from Drive 03'.
Number of active faults indication:
● 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the number of active faults.
● Determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404 by referring to
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address .
● Enter parameter ID 9404.
– The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
– Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
● Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
● Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER].
– The display now shows "ManId-3000".
– The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
– If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 6-21 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
124 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 125
Ethernet / IP Communication
6.5 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
126 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Profibus Communication 7
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a Profibus™
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
7.1 Description
The drive supports Profibus™ communication via an Anybus™ Profibus™ module.
Profibus™ communication functions in the following way:
● Profibus™ is a token ring network. Master devices (or active stations) are those devices that
initiate communication. When a master receives the "token" it may then perform masterslave communications with its slaves (or passive stations).
● The drive acts as a slave (passive station) on the Profibus™ network. The drive auto detects
the baud rate from the network.
The Anybus™ module has a 9 pin DB-9F connector. Pin 3 is the positive data pin (RxD/TxD-P)
and pin 8 is the negative connection (RxD/TxD-N). The modules support the following baud
rates:
● 9.6 kbit/sec
● 19.2 kbit/sec
● 93.75 kbit/sec
● 187.5 kbit/sec
● 500 kbit/sec
● 1.5 Mbit/sec
● 3 Mbit/sec
● 6 Mbit/sec
● 12 Mbit/sec.
Profibus is a trademark of the Profibus Trade Organization.
To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ Profibus™
module.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 127
7.1.1 Anybus Profibus Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector, switches and status indicators on the Anybus™
Profibus™ module.
1 Profibus connector
2 Termination switch
3 Rotary switches (must be set to zero)
4 Status indicators
Figure 7-1 Anybus Profibus Module
Connector
The connector is a 9 pin DB-9F connector. The following figure shows the pin assignments.
1 Pin 3: Data (RxD/TxD) positive
2 Pin 5: Data ground
3 Pin 8: Data (RxD/TxD) negative
Figure 7-2 Connector Pin Assignments
Profibus Communication
7.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
128 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Rotary Switches
The rotary switches must both be set to 0, as shown in the following figure.
0 0
Figure 7-3 Rotary Switch Setting
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 7-4 Status Indicators
The table explains the status indicators.
Table 7-1 Status Indicator Descriptions
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Not used N/a N/a
2 On-line status Off Module is not online.
Green Module is online on the fieldbus.
3 Off-line status Off Module is not offline.
Red Module is offline from the fieldbus.
4 Fieldbus diagnos‐
tics
Off No diagnostics present.
Red, flashing at 1 Hz Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initial‐
ization of the module is not equal to the length set during
configuration of the network.
Red, flashing at 2 Hz Error in User Parameter data: the length/contents of the User
Parameter data set during initialization of the module is not
equal to the length/contents set during configuration of the
network.
Red, flashing at 4 Hz Error in initialization of the Profibus™ communication ASIC.
Termination Switch
The physical end nodes in a Profibus™ network must be terminated to avoid reflections on the
bus line. Use the termination switch on the module to terminate.
If the module is used at either of the physical ends of the network, the termination switch has
to be in the ON (down) position. In any other case, the switch must be in the OFF (up) position,
as shown in the following figure.
Profibus Communication
7.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 129
9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1
ON
Figure 7-5 Anybus Profibus Termination Switch in OFF position
7.2 Software Programming
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 7-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' me‐
nus
Corresponding Drctry.pro bits Profibus Network Data
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
7.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Profibus Communication
7.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
130 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 7-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Table 7-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Profibus Communication
7.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 131
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
7.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 7-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Profibus Communication
7.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
132 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 7-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the Profibus network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 133
7.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Profibus™ network
register. The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● Profibus™ Network Data
Profibus™ uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the master and the
drive.
– The drive uses up to 136 bytes for input and output; 128 bytes are used to form the 64
16-bit registers (2 bytes per register) and 8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.
– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data
sent to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.
– Network data size may be limited to 16, 32, 64, 96, 128, or 136 bytes for input and output
using parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O Size' (9952). At 136 bytes,
only 128 are available to the user. You must configure the Profibus™ master to have the
same quantity of bytes.
– Each network register is 16 bits (2 bytes). The order of the bytes can be swapped to
match the network data format (9953, 9954).
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Table 7-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Profibus Network Data
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents Profibus Network Data
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Bytes 01 and 02 to net‐
work
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Bytes 03 and 04 to net‐
work
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 to net‐
work
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Bytes 03 and 04 from net‐
work
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
134 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents Profibus Network Data
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 from net‐
work
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Bytes 01 and 02 to net‐
work
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Bytes 03 and 04 to net‐
work
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 to net‐
work
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Bytes 03 and 04 from net‐
work
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 from net‐
work
7.3.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 7-8 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Table 7-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 135
Network 1 Parameters
Table 7-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 7-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Profibus Address 9904 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profibus network.
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the net‐
work.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from
the network.
Network 1 I/O Size 9951 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.
Net 1 Swap Bytes 9953 Off Swap register byte order:
● Off
● On
Table 7-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
136 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 7-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Network 2 Parameters
Table 7-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 7-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Profibus Address 9918 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profibus network.
Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the
network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Network 2 I/O Size 9952 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.
Net 2 Swap Bytes 9954 Off Swap register byte order:
● Off
● On
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 137
Table 7-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 7-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
7.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 7-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
138 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 139
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
140 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 141
Table 7-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
142 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
Profibus Communication
7.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 143
7.4 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● PLC setup
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
7.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
4. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Table 7-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
144 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
7.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
4. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 145
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 7-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
See also
Network Setup Procedure (Page 148)
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
146 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
7.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
7.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
4. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
5. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
See also
Software Programming (Page 130)
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 147
7.4.5 PLC Setup using GSD files
A GSD file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the
Profibus™ Trade Organization (PTO) guidelines. Contact Siemens customer service for GSD
files.
Each device on the Profibus™ network must have a GSD file. The GSD file provides all relevant
data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.
The GSD file provides an option for 136 bytes of input and output. If the configuration tool
cannot accommodate 136 bytes, the GSD file allows the choice of adding 8 or 16 bytes at a
time, until the correct quantity of input and output bytes are selected.
● To communicate with the drive, you must configure the Profibus™ master to have the same
quantity of bytes that are set by parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O
Size' (9952).
7.4.6 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Profibus" and press
[ENTER]. The Profibus™ configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
4. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %
5. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
148 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
6. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available registers with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed registers, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
7. Define the bits in the available registers using one of the following methods:
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Software Programming (Page 130)
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 134)
Parameter Tables (Page 135)
Pick List Variable Tables (Page 138)
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
Set flags in the SOP for drive control through a network
Ensure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:
1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following
network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in
the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 149
7.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20-40
milliseconds.
If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network
status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.
7.4.8 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
To indicate general status and motor speed:
1. The table shows that:
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
To indicate output power:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output
power.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.
3. Enter parameter ID 9403.
4. Choose "output power" from the pick list.
The output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
150 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
To indicate the number of active faults:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the
number of active faults.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.
3. Enter parameter ID 9404.
4. The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
5. Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
Since "number of active faults" is not a choice in the pick list, instead choose "Man Id"
(manual ID). The display shows "ManId-0000".
6. Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
7. Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER]. The display now shows
"ManId-3000".
The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
● If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 7-22 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 134)
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 151
Profibus Communication
7.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
152 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ProfiDrive Communication 8
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a ProfiDrive™
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
8.1 Description
The drive supports ProfiDrive™ communication via the Anybus™ Profibus™ DP-V1 IM module.
ProfiDrive™ communication functions in the following way:
● Cyclic data is supported via standard ProfiDrive™ telegrams.
● Acyclic read/write services allow read/write access to drive menu parameters.
● The drive acts as a slave (passive station) on the Profibus™ network. The drive auto detects
the baud rate from the network.
The module supports the following baud rates:
● 9.6 kbit/sec
● 19.2 kbit/sec
● 93.75 kbit/sec
● 187.5 kbit/sec
● 500 kbit/sec
● 1.5 Mbit/sec
● 3 Mbit/sec
● 6 Mbit/sec
● 12 Mbit/sec.
To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 153
8.1.1 Anybus Profibus DP-V1 IM Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector, switches and status indicators on the Anybus™
Profibus™ DP-V1 IM module.
1 Profibus connector
2 Termination switch
3 Rotary switches (must be set to zero)
4 Status indicators
Figure 8-1 Anybus Profibus Module
Connector
The connector is a 9 pin DB-9F connector. The following figure shows the pin assignments.
1 Pin 3: Data (RxD/TxD) positive
2 Pin 5: Data ground
3 Pin 8: Data (RxD/TxD) negative
Figure 8-2 Connector Pin Assignments
ProfiDrive Communication
8.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
154 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Rotary Switches
The rotary switches must both be set to 0, as shown in the following figure.
0 0
Figure 8-3 Rotary Switch Setting
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 8-4 Status Indicators
The table explains the status indicators.
Table 8-1 Status Indicator Descriptions
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Acyclic traffic Off No power on the module or no DP-V1 request is currently
being executed.
Green A DP-V1 request is currently being executed.
2 Fieldbus on-line Off Bus is offline or no power on the module.
Green Bus is online and data exchange is possible.
Green, flashing at
1 Hz
Clear mode
Red Application stopped.
3 Fieldbus off-line Off Bus is offline or no power on the module.
Red Bus is offline.
4 Fieldbus diagnos‐
tics
Off No diagnostics present or no power on the module.
Red, flashing at 1 Hz Error in configuration data.
Red, flashing at 2 Hz Error in parameter data.
Red, flashing at 4 Hz Error in initialization of the Profibus™ communication ASIC.
Termination Switch
The physical end nodes in a Profibus™ network must be terminated to avoid reflections on the
bus line. Use the termination switch on the module to terminate.
If the module is used at either of the physical ends of the network, the termination switch has
to be in the ON (down) position. In any other case, the switch must be in the OFF (up) position,
as shown in the following figure.
ProfiDrive Communication
8.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 155
9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1
ON
Figure 8-5 Anybus Profibus Termination Switch in OFF position
Supported Functions
The module supports the following functions:
● Cyclic data
● Acyclic data (Class 1 and Class 2 services):
– The DP-V1 extension enables acyclic read/write operations between a Class 1/Class 2
master and a DP-V1 slave in parallel with the cyclic user data communication.
– Supported Class 1 services:
MSAC1_Read
MSAC1_Write
Status Diagnostics
– Supported Class 2 services:
MSAC2_Initiate
MSAC2_Abort
MSAC2_Read
MSAC2_Write
MSAC2_Transport
Note
● The module can support 4 simultaneous Class 2 communications.
● The drive does not support the Class 2 MSAC2 Transport service.
● Identification and maintenance (I&M) support:
– I&M support provides a standard way of gathering information about an I/O device. I&M
information is accessed by the master through DP-V1 read/write service.
ProfiDrive Communication
8.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
156 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
● Telegram data tables:
– Supported telegrams
– Detail of each telegram
– Signal description
– Signal bit description
– Supported parameters
8.2.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding ProfiDrive™ telegram.
The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● ProfiDrive™ Telegram
The drive software supports ProfiDrive™ telegrams as listed in Table Supported
ProfiDrive™ Telegrams. Refer to the table for each supported telegram for related signal
names for the "To Drive" and "From Drive" data. Configure Telegrams 998 and 999 via the
menu system as described in Section Network Setup Procedure. Telegrams 1, 2, 20 and
352 do not require menu configuration.
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 157
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Table 8-2 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and ProfiDrive Telegram
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents ProfiDrive Telegram
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status Not used
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed Not used
1 9403 to 9416 Data From Drive 03 to 16 None 999 and 998
1 9417 to 9432 Data From Drive 17 to 32 None 998
1 9443 to 9464 Data From Drive 33 to 64 None Not used
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits Not used
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand Not used
1 9603 to 9616 Data To Drive 03 to 16 None 999 and 998
1 9617 to 9632 Data To Drive 17 to 32 None 998
1 9633 to 9664 Data To Drive 33 to 64 None Not used
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status Not used
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed Not used
2 9503 to 9516 Data From Drive 03 to 16 None 999 and 998
2 9517 to 9532 Data From Drive 17 to 32 None 998
2 9543 to 9564 Data From Drive 33 to 64 None Not used
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits Not used
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand Not used
2 9703 to 9716 Data To Drive 03 to 16 None 999 and 998
2 9717 to 9732 Data To Drive 17 to 32 None 998
2 9733 to 9764 Data To Drive 33 to 64 None Not used
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
158 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
8.2.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 8-3 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Network 1 Parameters
Table 8-4 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 8-5 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Profibus Address 9904 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profibus
network.
Net 1 Swap Bytes 9953 Off Swap register byte order:
● Off
● On
Telegram Number 9958 1 Select the active ProfiDrive telegram:
● 1
● 2
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 159
Table 8-6 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Status Not used
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Not used
Data From Drive 03 to 16 9403 to 9416 None Telegrams 999 and 998
Data From Drive 17 to 32 9417 to 9432 None Telegram 998
Data From Drive 33 to 64 9443 to 9464 None Not used
Table 8-7 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive 01 9601 Fixed Reg Bits Not used
Data To Drive 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Not used
Data To Drive 03 to 16 9603 to 9616 None Telegrams 999 and 998
Data To Drive 17 to 32 9617 to 9632 None Telegram 998
Data To Drive 33 to 64 9633 to 9664 None Not used
Network 2 Parameters
Table 8-8 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connec‐
ted to the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
160 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 8-9 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Profibus Address 9918 2 2 124 Set the address of the node on the Profibus
network.
Net 2 Swap Bytes 9954 Off Swap register byte order:
● Off
● On
Telegram Number 9959 1 Select the active ProfiDrive telegram:
● 1
● 2
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
Table 8-10 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Status Not used
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Not used
Data From Drive 03
to 16
9503 to 9516 None Telegrams 999 and 998
Data From Drive 17
to 32
9517 to 9532 Telegram 998
Data From Drive 33
to 64
9543 to 9564 Not used
Table 8-11 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive 01 9701 Fixed Reg Bits Not used
Data To Drive 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Not used
Data To Drive 03 to
16
9703 to 9716 None Telegrams 999 and 998
Data To Drive 17 to
32
9717 to 9732 None Telegram 998
Data To Drive 33 to
64
9733 to 9764 None Not used
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 161
8.2.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 8-12 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
162 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 163
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
164 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
Table 8-13 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 165
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
166 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
8.2.4 Telegram Data Tables
Telegram Data
Table 8-14 Supported ProfiDrive Telegrams
Telegram Number From Drive PZD* Size To Drive PZD* Size
1 2 2 2 4 4
20 6 2
352 6 6
999 16 16
998 32 32
* Process Data
Table 8-15 Telegram 1
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_A 2 NSOLL_A
Table 8-16 Telegram 2
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_B (msw) 2 NSOLL_B (msw)
3 NIST_B (lsw) 3 NSOLL_B (lsw)
4 ZSW2 4 STW2
Table 8-17 Telegram 20
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_A 2 NSOLL_A
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 167
Data From Drive Data To Drive
3 IAIST_GLATT
4 MIST_GLATT
5 PIST_GLATT
6 MELD_NAMUR
Table 8-18 Telegram 352
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_A 2 NSOLL_A
3 IAIST_GLATT 3 (9603) Menu Data
4 MIST_GLATT 4 (9604) Menu Data
5 PIST_GLATT 5 (9605) Menu Data
6 MELD_NAMUR 6 (9606) Menu Data
Table 8-19 Telegram 999
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_A 2 NSOLL_A
3 (9403) Menu Data 3 (9603) Menu Data
4 (9404) Menu Data 4 (9604) Menu Data
5 (9405) Menu Data 5 (9605) Menu Data
6 (9406) Menu Data 6 (9606) Menu Data
7 (9407) Menu Data 7 (9607) Menu Data
8 (9408) Menu Data 8 (9608) Menu Data
9 (9409) Menu Data 9 (9609) Menu Data
10 (9410) Menu Data 10 (9610) Menu Data
11 (9411) Menu Data 11 (9611) Menu Data
12 (9412) Menu Data 12 (9612) Menu Data
13 (9413) Menu Data 13 (9613) Menu Data
14 (9414) Menu Data 14 (9614) Menu Data
15 (9415) Menu Data 15 (9615) Menu Data
16 (9416) Menu Data 16 (9616) Menu Data
Table 8-20 Telegram 998
Data From Drive Data To Drive
1 ZSW1 1 STW1
2 NIST_A 2 NSOLL_A
3 (9403) Menu Data 3 (9603) Menu Data
4 (9404) Menu Data 4 (9604) Menu Data
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
168 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data From Drive Data To Drive
5 (9405) Menu Data 5 (9605) Menu Data
6 (9406) Menu Data 6 (9606) Menu Data
7 (9407) Menu Data 7 (9607) Menu Data
8 (9408) Menu Data 8 (9608) Menu Data
9 (9409) Menu Data 9 (9609) Menu Data
10 (9410) Menu Data 10 (9610) Menu Data
11 (9411) Menu Data 11 (9611) Menu Data
12 (9412) Menu Data 12 (9612) Menu Data
13 (9413) Menu Data 13 (9613) Menu Data
14 (9414) Menu Data 14 (9614) Menu Data
15 (9415) Menu Data 15 (9615) Menu Data
16 (9416) Menu Data 16 (9616) Menu Data
17 (9417) Menu Data 17 (9617) Menu Data
18 (9418) Menu Data 18 (9618) Menu Data
19 (9419) Menu Data 19 (9619) Menu Data
20 (9420) Menu Data 20 (9620) Menu Data
21 (9421) Menu Data 21 (9621) Menu Data
22 (9422) Menu Data 22 (9622) Menu Data
23 (9423) Menu Data 23 (9623) Menu Data
24 (9424) Menu Data 24 (9624) Menu Data
25 (9425) Menu Data 25 (9625) Menu Data
26 (9426) Menu Data 26 (9626) Menu Data
27 (9427) Menu Data 27 (9627) Menu Data
28 (9428) Menu Data 28 (9628) Menu Data
29 (9429) Menu Data 29 (9629) Menu Data
30 (9430) Menu Data 30 (9630) Menu Data
31 (9431) Menu Data 31 (9631) Menu Data
32 (9432) Menu Data 32 (9632) Menu Data
Signal Description
Table 8-21 Data from Drive Signals
Signal Name Description Supported Telegram
IAIST_GLATT Output current ● 20
● 352
NIST_A Speed feedback ● 1
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
NIST_B Speed feedback (32 bit) ● 2
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 169
Signal Name Description Supported Telegram
MELD_NAMUR Drive status/fault word ● 20
● 352
MIST_GLATT Torque active value ● 20
● 352
PIST_GLATT Active power ● 20
● 352
ZSW1 Status word ● 1
● 2
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
ZSW2 Status word 2, mapped from SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_O – Network1Flag16_O
● 2
Table 8-22 Data to Drive Signals
Signal Name Description Supported Telegram
NSOLL_A Speed Command ● 1
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
NSOLL_B Speed Command (32 Bit) ● 2
STW1 Control Word ● 1
● 2
● 20
● 352
● 999
● 998
STW2 Control Word 2, mapped to SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I – Network1Flag16_I
● 2
Signal Bit Description
Table 8-23 ZSW1 Signal: Status Bits
Bit Description
0 -Off (Off1)
1 -Coast Stop (Off2)
2 -Quick Stop (Off3)
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
170 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Bit Description
3 +Enable Operation
4 -Reset Ramp Generator
5 -Freeze Ramp Generator
6 +Enable Speed Setpoint
7 +Acknowledge Fault (0->1)
8 +Jogging1 On
9 +Jogging2 On
10 +Controlled by PLC
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
+ indicates an active high signal.
- indicates an active low signal.
Table 8-24 STW1 Signal: Control Bits
Bit Description
0 +Ready to Switch On
1 +Operation Enabled
2 +Fault Preset
3 -Coast Stop Activated (Off2)
4 -Quick Stop Activated (Off3)
5 +Switching On Inhibited
6 +Frequency = Setpoint
7 +Warning Present
8 +Frequency = Setpoint
9 +PLC Control Requested
10 +Frequency Reached
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
Table 8-25 Supported Parameters
PNU* Description Data Type Read/Write
918 Node address Unsigned16 Read
922 Telegram selection Unsigned16 Read
ProfiDrive Communication
8.2 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 171
PNU* Description Data Type Read/Write
928 Control priority DO IO
data
Unsigned16 Read
930 Operating mode Unsigned16 Read
944 Fault message counter Unsigned16 Read
947 Fault number Array [n] of Unsigned16 Read
950 Scaling of fault buffer Array [2] of Unsigned16 Read
952 Fault situation counter Unsigned16 Read
964 Drive unit identification Array [n] of Unsigned16 Read
963 Profile identification OctetString 2 Read
975 DO identification Array [n] of Unsigned16 Read
978 List all DO-IDs Array [n] of Unsigned8 Read
980 to 989 Number list of defined
parameter
Array [n] of Unsigned16 Read
* Parameter number
8.3 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedure
● PLC setup
● Network setup procedure
Note
The fast setup procedure allows setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
ProfiDrive Communication
8.3 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
172 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
8.3.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using ProfiDrive™ communication, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "Profibus".
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Telegram Number' (9958) to the desired value for cyclic data use, using one
of the following options:
– 1
– 2
– 20
– 352
– 999
– 998
4. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = True;
8.3.2 PLC Setup using GSD files
A GSD file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the
Profibus™ Trade Organization (PTO) guidelines. Contact Siemens customer service for GSD
files.
Each device on the Profibus™ network must have a GSD file. The GSD file provides all relevant
data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.
The ProfiDrive™ GSD file provides support for cyclic data by selecting one of the supported
telegrams. Refer to Table Supported ProfiDrive™ Telegrams in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing for a list of supported telegrams.
See also
Telegram Data Tables (Page 167)
ProfiDrive Communication
8.3 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 173
8.3.3 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "Profibus" and press
[ENTER]. The Profibus™ configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'Profibus Address' (9904) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Telegram Number' (9958) to the desired value for cyclic data use, using one
of the following options:
– 1
– 2
– 20
– 352
– 999
– 998
If the Telegram selected is 999 or 998 proceed to step 4, otherwise setup is complete.
4. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available registers with
corresponding parameter ID.
5. Define the bits in the available registers using one of the following methods:
ProfiDrive Communication
8.3 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
174 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 157)
Parameter Tables (Page 159)
Pick List Variable Tables (Page 162)
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
8.3.4 Network Status (auto detect)
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20-40
milliseconds.
If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network
status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.
ProfiDrive Communication
8.3 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 175
ProfiDrive Communication
8.3 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
176 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication 9
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a DeviceNet™
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
● Available functions
9.1 Description
The drive supports DeviceNet™ (Profile 12) communication via the Anybus-S™ DeviceNet™
module.
DeviceNet™ (Profile 12) communication functions in the following way:
● The Anybus-S™ DeviceNet™ module is implemented according to the Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association (ODVA) specification for a communication adapter (Profile 12) and acts
as a "group two only server" on the network.
● The baud rate and network address are selected through the drive menu system.
The module supports the following baud rates:
● 125 kbit/s
● 250 kbit/s
● 500 kbit/s
DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA. Additional information about DeviceNet™ is available from
www.odva.org.
To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 177
9.1.1 Anybus DeviceNet Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector, switches and status indicators on the Anybus™
DeviceNet™ module.
1 Connector to NXGpro Fiber Optic Board
2 DeviceNet connector
3 Configuration switches (not used)
4 Status indicators
5 Anybus watchdog
Figure 9-1 Anybus DeviceNet Module
Connector
The module supports the following connectors:
● 3.84 mm pluggable screw connector
● 5.08 mm pluggable screw connector
● 10-pin 2 mm board-to-board connector. The following figure shows the pin assignments.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
178 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
1 V- (power conductor) Color: black
2 CANL (signal conductor) Color: blue
3 Shield Color: bare
4 CANH (signal conductor) Color: white
5 V+ (power conductor) Color: red
Figure 9-2 Connector Pin Assignments
The maximum cable length varies based on transmission speed and cable type, as shown in
the following table.
Baud Rate Trunk Distance (thick cable)
125 kbit/s 500 meters (1640 feet)
250 kbit/s 250 meters (820 feet)
500 kbit/s 100 meters (328 feet)
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 9-3 Status Indicators
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 179
The table explains the status indicators.
Table 9-1 Status Indicator Descriptions
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Reserved N/a Reserved for future use.
2 Network status Off Not powered or not online.
Green Link OK, on line and connected.
Green, flashing On line, not connected.
Red Critical link failure.
Red, flashing Connection timeout.
3 Module status Off No power to drive.
Green Device operational.
Green, flashing Data size bigger than configured.
Red Unrecoverable fault.
Red, flashing Minor fault.
4 Reserved N/a Reserved for future use.
Termination Resistor
The physical end nodes in a DeviceNet™ network must each have a termination resistor
installed.
The termination resistor is connected across the data lines. Refer to the recommendations of
the ODVA for values of network termination resistors.
9.2 Software Programming
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
180 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 9-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' me‐
nus
Corresponding Drctry.pro bits DeviceNet Network Data
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
9.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 181
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 9-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Table 9-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
9.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
182 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 9-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 9-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the DeviceNet network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 183
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
9.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding Profibus™ network
register. The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● DeviceNet™ Network Data
DeviceNet™ (Profile 12) uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the master
and the drive.
– The drive uses up to 136 bytes for input and output; 128 bytes are used to form the 64
16-bit registers (2 bytes per register) and 8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.
– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data
sent to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.
– Network data size may be limited to 16, 32, 64, 96, 128, or 136 bytes for input and output
using parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network 2 I/O Size' (9952). At 136 bytes,
only 128 are available to the user. You must configure the DeviceNet™ master to have
the same quantity of bytes.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
184 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Table 9-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and DeviceNet Network Data
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents DeviceNet Network Data
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Bytes 01 and 02 to net‐
work
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Bytes 03 and 04 to net‐
work
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 to net‐
work
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Bytes 03 and 04 from net‐
work
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 from net‐
work
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Bytes 01 and 02 to net‐
work
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Bytes 03 and 04 to net‐
work
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 to net‐
work
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Bytes 01 and 02 from net‐
work
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Bytes 03 and 04 from net‐
work
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Bytes 05 to 128 from net‐
work
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 185
9.3.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 9-8 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Table 9-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Network 1 Parameters
Table 9-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 9-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
DeviceNet Baud
Rate
9905 125K Set the DeviceNet network baud rate:
● 125K
● 250K
● 500K
DeviceNet Address 9908 10 1 63 Set the address of the node on the DeviceNet network.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
186 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the net‐
work.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Network 1 I/O Size 9951 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.
Table 9-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 9-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 187
Network 2 Parameters
Table 9-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 9-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
DeviceNet Baud
Rate
9919 125K Set the DeviceNet network baud rate:
● 125K
● 250K
● 500K
DeviceNet Address 9922 10 1 63 Set the address of the node on the DeviceNet network.
Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the
network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Network 2 I/O Size 9952 136 16 136 Select the number of input and output data bytes.
Table 9-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
188 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 9-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
9.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 9-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 189
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
190 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 191
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
192 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 9-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 193
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
194 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
9.4 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● PLC setup
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
9.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".
2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Baud Rate' (9905); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
5. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Table 9-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 195
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
9.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".
2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Baud Rate' (9905); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
5. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
196 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 9-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
See also
Network Setup Procedure (Page 199)
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 197
9.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
9.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "DeviceNet".
2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Baud Rate' (9905); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
5. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
6. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
See also
Software Programming (Page 180)
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
198 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
9.4.5 PLC Setup using EDS files
Overview
An EDS file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the
ODVA guidelines. Contact Siemens customer service for EDS files.
Each device on the DeviceNet™ network must have an EDS file. The EDS file provides all
relevant data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.
The EDS file provides an option for more than 136 bytes of input and output; however, the drive
only uses up to 136 bytes of input and output. If the configuration tool cannot accommodate 136
bytes, you can modify the I/O Size, until the correct quantity of input and output bytes are
selected:
● To communicate with the drive, you must configure the DeviceNet™ master to have the
same quantity of bytes that are set by parameter 'Network 1 I/O Size' (9951) or 'Network
2 I/O Size' (9952).
9.4.6 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "DeviceNet" and press
[ENTER]. The DeviceNet™ configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Baud Rate' (9905); this must match the baud rate of the PLC
controller.
3. Set parameter 'DeviceNet Address' (9908) to the desired network address for the drive.
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
5. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %
6. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 199
7. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available registers with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed registers, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
8. Define the bits in the available registers using one of the following methods:
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Software Programming (Page 180)
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 184)
Parameter Tables (Page 186)
Pick List Variable Tables (Page 189)
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
Set flags in the SOP for drive control through a network
Ensure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:
1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following
network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in
the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
200 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
9.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20-40
milliseconds.
If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network
status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.
9.4.8 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
To indicate general status and motor speed:
1. The table shows that:
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
To indicate output power:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output
power.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.
3. Enter parameter ID 9403.
4. Choose "output power" from the pick list.
The output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 201
To indicate the number of active faults:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the
number of active faults.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.
3. Enter parameter ID 9404.
4. The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
5. Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
Since "number of active faults" is not a choice in the pick list, instead choose "Man Id"
(manual ID). The display shows "ManId-0000".
6. Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
7. Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER]. The display now shows
"ManId-3000".
The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
● If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 9-22 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 184)
DeviceNet (Profile 12) Communication
9.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
202 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ControlNet Communication 10
This chapter contains instructions for controlling the drive using a PLC over a ControlNet™
network. It addresses the following topics:
● Description of the interface
● User Programming
● Parameter assignment and addressing
● Configuration and setup options
10.1 Description
The drive supports ControlNet™ communication via the Anybus-S™ ControlNet™ module.
ControlNet™ communication functions in the following way:
● The Anybus-S™ ControlNet™ module is classified as a ControlNet™ adapter, that is, the
module cannot originate connections on its own, but a scanner node can open a connection
to the module. The module is implemented according to the ControlNet™ International
specification for a communication adapter (Profile 12).
● The module has 2 BNC contacts for connection to the ControlNet™ network.
Additional information about ControlNet™ is available from www.controlnet.org.
To enable dual network functionality, this protocol requires an additional Anybus™ module.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 203
10.1.1 Anybus ControlNet Module
Description
The following figure shows the connector, switches and status indicators on the Anybus™
ControlNet™ module.
1 Connector to NXGpro Fiber Optic Board
2 Network Access Port (NAP)
3 ControlNet Channel A
4 ControlNet Channel B
5 MacID switch (x10)
6 MacID switch (x1)
7 Status indicators
8 Anybus watchdog
Figure 10-1 Anybus ControlNet Module
Connector
The module is equipped with two BNC contacts (Channel A and Channel B) for connection to
ControlNet™ as follows:
● For redundant operation: use both Channel A and Channel B connectors
● Otherwise: use connector Channel A or Channel B.
MacID Switches
The MacID switches must both ALWAYS be set to 0, to allow the control software to set the
MacID from the menu.
ControlNet Communication
10.1 Description
NXGpro Communication
204 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Status Indicators
The following figure shows the status indicators.
Figure 10-2 Status Indicators
The table explains the status indicators.
Table 10-1 Status Indicator Descriptions
Status Indicator
(figure number)
Indication State Description
1 Module status Green Connection in Run State.
Green, flashing Connecting Connection Idle.
Red Major fault
Red, flashing Minor fault
2 and 3 Channel A and
Channel B
Off Module not initialized.
Green/red, alternating Self-test
Red Major fault
Red, flashing Node configuration error. For example: duplicate MAC ID.
2 or 3 Channel A or
Channel B
Off Channel disabled.
Green Normal operation of channel.
Green, flashing Temporary error (node will self correct) or not configured.
Red, flashing No other nodes, or media fault
Red/green, flashing Network configuration error.
4 Module owned Off No connection has been opened.
Green A connection has been opened towards the module.
10.2 Software Programming
This section provides details for user programming through the SOP.
The fixed register bits are defined by the drive's software by default. To reprogram the definition
of the bits, complete these steps:
1. Set parameters using the procedure Fast Setup: control the drive using user-defined bits
controlled by the SOP in Section Planning/Configuring.
2. Refer to the procedures detailed in this section to complete setup:
– programmable inputs to the drive
– programmable outputs from the drive
ControlNet Communication
10.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 205
The following table shows how the fixed register bits correspond with programmable bits
available for use in the SOP (drctry.pro bits).
Table 10-2 Network 1 and 2: Fixed Register Bits
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' me‐
nus
Corresponding Drctry.pro bits ControlNet Network Data
Fixed Reg Bits (network 1) Network1FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network1FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Word 1 from network
Fixed Reg Bits (network 2) Network2FixedRegBit0_I ~ Network2FixedReg‐
Bit15_I
Word 1 from network
10.2.1 Programmable Inputs to the Drive
Description
There are 64 input bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can be
programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data to drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data to drive register for network 1 is register 'Data
to Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9603).
2. Enter parameter ID (9603).
3. The pick list of data to drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data to Drive Pick List
Variables and Scaling in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data to drive
pick list variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net Input Flag 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
Now the corresponding bits from the drctry.pro file can be used in the SOP, as shown below:
;Network1Flag0_I Use bit 0 for Stop bit
;Network1Flag1_I Use bit 1 for Run Forward bit
RunRequest_O = /Network1Flag0_I * Network1Flag1_I;Run drive using
bit 1,stop using bit 0
5. Select 'Net Input Flag 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
Note
By choosing 'Data to Drive 03' as the write register, the PLC must now send 0x02 in register
'Data to Drive 03' to run the drive.
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x01 in register 'Data to Drive 03'.
ControlNet Communication
10.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
206 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable input bits are found in the following
tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 10-3 Network 1: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9603-9664)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Table 10-4 Network 2: Programmable input bits (parameter ID 9703-9764)
Pick list variable in 'Data to Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net Input Flag 1 Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to trip the input medium
voltage:
● The PLC writes to register 'Data to Drive 03' which is programmed to 'Net Input Flag 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that uses a digital output to trip input medium voltage, using the
following SOP source code:
;ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O Use digital output to trip input medium voltage
ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O = Network1FixedRegBit9_I;
● The PLC writes the contents of 'Net Input Flag 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_I) to create an input
medium voltage trip.
10.2.2 Programmable Outputs from the Drive
Description
There are 64 output bits available for user programming through the SOP file. These bits can
be programmed to set or reset any other bits used within the SOP.
ControlNet Communication
10.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 207
Programming Procedure
1. Locate the first data from drive register that is programmable using Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
You will see that the first programmable data from drive register for network 1 is register
'Data from Drive 03', which corresponds to parameter ID (9403).
2. Enter parameter ID (9403).
3. The pick list of data from drive variables will appear. Refer to Table Data from Drive Pick List
Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for a list of data from drive pick list
variables.
4. Scroll through the pick list until you come to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' and press [ENTER]. This
setting uses the first 16 bits of the possible 64 bits.
5. Select 'Net1 Out Reg 2' to use the second set of 16 bits, and so on.
The pick list variables and the corresponding programmable output bits are found in the
following tables for network 1 and 2, respectively.
Table 10-5 Network 1: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9403-9464)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net1 Out Reg 1 Network1Flag0_O ~ Network1Flag15_O
Net1 Out Reg 2 Network1Flag16_O ~ Network1Flag31_O
Net1 Out Reg 3 Network1Flag32_O ~ Network1Flag47_O
Net1 Out Reg 4 Network1Flag48_O ~ Network1Flag63_O
Table 10-6 Network 2: Programmable output bits (parameter ID 9503-9564)
Pick list variable in 'Data from Drive Reg nn' menus Related Drctry.pro bits
Net2 Out Reg 1 Network2Flag0_O ~ Network2Flag15_O
Net2 Out Reg 2 Network2Flag16_O ~ Network2Flag31_O
Net2 Out Reg 3 Network2Flag32_O ~ Network2Flag47_O
Net2 Out Reg 4 Network2Flag48_O ~ Network2Flag63_O
Example
The following example shows how the network can be programmed to detect a trip on the input
medium voltage:
● The PLC reads register 'Data from Drive 03', which is programmed to 'Net1 Out Reg 1' using
the procedure above.
● The SOP sets a flag bit that corresponds to a medium voltage low fault, using the following
SOP source code:
; Monitor medium voltage fault on the ControlNet network
Network1Flag9_O = MediumVoltageLowFault_I;
ControlNet Communication
10.2 Software Programming
NXGpro Communication
208 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
● This example uses bit 9 of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', which is Network1Flag9_O, to set the network
flag true if the medium voltage low fault is active.
● The PLC reads the contents of 'Net1 Out Reg 1', bit 9 (Network1Flag9_O) to determine if a
medium voltage fault occured.
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
This section provides the following information for communication configuration and
programming:
● Drive parameter ID and corresponding communication protocol address
● Parameter tables:
– Network configuration parameters
– Network 1 configuration parameters
– Network 2 configuration parameters
● Pick list variable tables:
– Data from Drive variables
– Data to Drive variables
10.3.1 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address
The following table provides drive parameter IDs and the corresponding ControlNet™ network
register. The following data is provided:
● Parameter ID
The drive parameter ID number to enter via the keypad or the ToolSuite.
● ControlNet™ Network Data
ControlNet™ uses a pre-defined byte count to communicate between the master and the
drive.
– The drive uses 136 bytes for input and output; 128 bytes are used to form the 64 16-bit
registers (2 bytes per register) and 8 bytes are ‘reserved’ for future use.
– The data received (128 bytes) is mapped to the 64 data to drive registers and the data
sent to the PLC is defined using the 64 data from drive registers.
– You must configure the ControlNet™ master to communicate using 136 input data bytes
and 136 output data bytes.
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 209
● Data From Drive
Data that the PLC will receive from the drive to determine how the drive is functioning.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the status of a particular aspect of
drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to track certain drive functions; others are programmable to track
any of a number of drive status choices.
● Data To Drive
Data that the PLC will send to the drive to control it.
Each register contains a 16-bit digital representation of the PLC's command for a particular
aspect of drive functionality.
Some registers are fixed to control certain functions; others are programmable to control
any of a number of drive function choices.
Table 10-7 Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and ControlNet Network Data
Network Parameter ID Description Default Contents ControlNet Network Data
1 9401 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Word 1 to network
1 9402 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Word 2 to network
1 9403 to 9464 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network
1 9601 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Word 1 from network
1 9602 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Word 2 from network
1 9603 to 9664 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 from net‐
work
2 9501 Data From Drive 01 General Status (not changea‐
ble)
Word 1 to network
2 9502 Data From Drive 02 Motor Speed (not changeable) Word 2 to network
2 9503 to 9564 Data From Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 to network
2 9701 Data To Drive 01 Fixed Register Bits (not
changeable)
Word 1 from network
2 9702 Data To Drive 02 Velocity Demand (not change‐
able)
Word 2 from network
2 9703 to 9764 Data To Drive 03 to 64 None Words 3 to 64 from net‐
work
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
210 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
10.3.2 Parameter Tables
Network Parameters
Table 10-8 Network Control Menu (9943)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net Control Type 9944 Sop Set bit definition:
● SOP
● Fixed
Start Stop Control 9945 Maintained Set Start/Stop bit inputs:
● Maintained
● Momentary
Table 10-9 Network 1 to 2 Register Copy (9946)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Net 1 to 2 reg. copy 9946 Function Copy Network 1 registers to Network 2
registers.
Network 1 Parameters
Table 10-10 Network 1: Configure Menu (9900)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 1 Type 9901 None Designate the type of external network connected to
the drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
Table 10-11 Network 1: Configure Parameters Menu (9902)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
ControlNet Address 9903 9 1 99 Set the address of the node on the ControlNet network.
ControlNet Header 9956 Off Set the ControlNet header:
● Off
● On
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 211
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Velocity Units 9080 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9912 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the net‐
work.
Aux Demand Scalar 9913 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference from
the network.
Table 10-12 Network 1: Register Data from Drive Menu (9400)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9401 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9402 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9403 to
9464
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 10-13 Network 1: Register Data to Drive Menu (9600)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9601 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9602 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9603 to
9664
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Network 2 Parameters
Table 10-14 Network 2: Configure Menu (9914)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Network 2 Type 9915 None Designate the type of external network connected to the
drive:
● None
● Modbus
● DeviceNet
● Profibus
● Ethernet Modbus
● ControlNet
● Ethernet I/P
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
212 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 10-15 Network 2: Configure Parameters Menu (9916)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
ControlNet Address 9939 9 1 99 Set the address of the node on the ControlNet network.
ControlNet Header 9957 Off Set the ControlNet header:
● Off
● On
Velocity Units 9924 % Designate the units for velocity values from the drive:
● %
● RPM
● Hz
Demand Scalar 9926 1 -125 125 Set the scalar for input demand reference from the
network.
Aux Demand Scalar 9927 1 -125 125 Set the auxiliary scalar for input demand reference
from the network.
Table 10-16 Network 2: Register Data from Drive Menu (9500)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data From Drive 01 9501 General Sta‐
tus
Register data from drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 02 9502 Motor Speed Register data from drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data From Drive 03 to 64 9503 to
9564
None Register data from drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
Table 10-17 Network 2: Register Data to Drive Menu (9700)
Parameter ID Unit Default Min Max Description
Data To Drive Reg 01 9701 Fixed Reg
Bits
Register data to drive parameter 1.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 02 9702 Velocity De‐
mand
Register data to drive parameter 2.
Register is not programmable.
Data To Drive Reg 03 to 64 9703 to
9764
None Register data to drive parameters 3 to 64.
Registers are programmable.
10.3.3 Pick List Variable Tables
Table 10-18 Data from Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None None
Man Id None None None None Refer to Appendix Internal Drive Network
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 213
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
General Status 2001 None None Bit Field ● Bit 0: Fault
● Bit 1: Alarm
● Bit 2: Running Forward
● Bit 3: Running Reverse
● Bit 4: Drive Ready
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Reference From Network
● Bit 7: At Speed Reference
● Bit 8: Speed In Percent
● Bit 9: Speed In RPM
● Bit 10: Speed In Hz
● Bit 11: Reserved for future use
● Bit 12: Reserved for future use
● Bit 13: Reserved for future use
● Bit 14: Reserved for future use
● Bit 15: Reserved for future use
Motor Voltage 2100 Volts /1 Unsigned
Total Current 2190 Amps /1 Unsigned
Output Power 2230 KW /1 Signed
Motor Speed 2014 % /10 Unsigned
RPM /1
Hz /10
Speed Demand 2060 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Reference 2010 % /100 Unsigned
Heartbeat 2220 None None Unsigned 1 count per millisecond
Drive State 2210 None None Unsigned ● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
Inp RMS Current 2130 Amps /1 Unsigned
Input Frequency 2140 Hz /100 Unsigned
Input Power Avg 2250 KW /1 Unsigned
Net1 Out Reg 1 2002 None None Bit Field Network1Flag0_I - Network1Flag15_I
Net1 Out Reg 2 2003 None None Bit Field Network1Flag16_I - Network1Flag31_I
Net1 Out Reg 3 2004 None None Bit Field Network1Flag32_I - Network1Flag37_I
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
214 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Net1 Out Reg 4 2005 None None Bit Field Network1Flag48_I - Network1Flag63_I
Net2 Out Reg 1 2006 None None Bit Field Network2Flag0_I - Network2Flag15_I
Net2 Out Reg 2 2007 None None Bit Field Network2Flag16_I - Network2Flag31_I
Net2 Out Reg 3 2008 None None Bit Field Network2Flag32_I - Network2Flag37_I
Net2 Out Reg 4 2009 None None Bit Field Network2Flag48_I - Network2Flag63_I
Torque Current 2150 Amps /1 Unsigned
Magnetizing Cur 2170 Amps /1 Unsigned
Motor Flux 2015 % /100 Unsigned
Motor Torque 2160 % /100 Unsigned
Flux Reference 2011 % /100 Unsigned
Input Voltage 2120 Volts /1 Unsigned
Inp Power Factor 2012 % /100 Unsigned
Input KVars 2013 KVAR /1 Unsigned
Max Available Output
Volts
2016 Volts /1 Unsigned
Hottest Cell Temp 2017 % /100 Unsigned Duty Cycle % of Hottest Cell
Mux1 Echo None None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data
Registers Mux1 Data
Mux2 Echo
Mux2 Data
Mux3 Echo
Mux3 Data
Mux4 Echo
Mux4 Data
Mux5 Echo
Mux5 Data
Mux6 Echo
Mux6 Data
Mux7 Echo
Mux7 Data
Mux8 Echo
Mux8 Data
Wago Inputs 1-16 2650 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput01a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput01h_I
ExternalDigitalInput02a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput02h_I
Wago Inputs 17-32 2651 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput03a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput03h_I
ExternalDigitalInput04a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput04h_I
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 215
Name
Manual ID Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Wago Inputs 33-48 2652 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput05a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput05h_I
ExternalDigitalInput06a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput06h_I
Wago Inputs 49-64 2653 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput07a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput07h_I
ExternalDigitalInput08a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput08h_I
Wago Inputs 65-80 2654 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput09a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput09h_I
ExternalDigitalInput10a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput10h_I
Wago Inputs 81-96 2655 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalInput11a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput11h_I
ExternalDigitalInput12a_I - ExternalDigita‐
lInput12h_I
Wago Outputs 1-16 2656 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput01h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput02a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput02h_O
Wago Outputs 17-32 2657 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput03a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput03h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput04a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput04h_O
Wago Outputs 33-48 2658 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput05a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput05h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput06a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput06h_O
Wago Outputs 49-64 2659 None None Bit Field ExternalDigitalOutput07a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput07h_O
ExternalDigitalOutput08a_O - ExternalDigi‐
talOutput08h_O
PFD1 None None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PFD2
PFD3
PFD4
Drive Losses 2161 % /100 Unsigned
Excessive Reactive
Current
2162 % /100 Unsigned
Speed Droop Percent 2163 % /100 Unsigned
Sync Motor Field Ref 2164 % /100 Unsigned
Avail Reactive Current 3653 % /100 Unsigned
Drive Efficiency 2168 % /100 Unsigned
Ids Ref Current 2276 % /100 Unsigned
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
216 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table 10-19 Data to Drive Pick List Variables
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
None None None None None
Fixed Reg Bits None None Bit Field When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'SOP' the bits will be used in the SOP to control
drive functions.
When parameter 'Net Control Type' (9945) is set
to 'Fixed' the bits will be defined as follows in the
control software.
● Bit 0: Run Forward
● Bit 1: Run Reverse
● Bit 2: Fault Reset
● Bit 3: Stop
● Bit 4: Reserved
● Bit 5: Start/Stop Control From Network
● Bit 6: Speed Command From Network
● Bit 7 - 15: Reserved for future assignment
Velocity Demand Hz /10 Signed Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Auxiliary Demand Hz /10 Signed Auxilary Speed Demand
RPM 1 % /10
Net Input Flag 1 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag0_I ~ Network1Flag15_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag0_I ~ Network2Flag15_I
Net Input Flag 2 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag16_I ~ Network1Flag31_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag16_I ~ Network2Flag31_I
Net Input Flag 3 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag32_I ~ Network1Flag47_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag32_I ~ Network2Flag47_I
Net Input Flag 4 None None Bit Field Network 1 SOP flags:
Network1Flag48_I ~ Network1Flag63_I
Network 2 SOP flags:
Network2Flag48_I ~ Network2Flag63_I
Ratio % % / 100 Signed
Forward Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Max Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 217
Name
Unit Scaling 16 Bit Data
Type
Notes
Forward Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Forward Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Acc Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Reverse Dec Time Seconds / 10 Unsigned
Net Input Pulse None None Unsigned
Forward Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Reverse Min Lim % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
Torque Limit % / 10000 or
% / 100
Unsigned
MUX1 Id None None None Refer to Appendix Multiplexer (MUX) Data Reg‐
isters MUX2 Id
MUX3 Id
MUX4 Id
MUX5 Id
MUX6 Id
MUX7 Id
MUX8 Id
PTD1 None None None Refer to Appendix Parameter Read/Write
PTD2
PTD3
PTD4
Parallel Cmd 1 None None Unsigned
Torque Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
PVCL Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Flux Demand % / 100 Unsigned
Node Count None None Unsigned
Node Index None None Unsigned
Torque Acc Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Dec Time Seconds / 100 Unsigned
Torque Offset None / 1000 Unsigned
Torque Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Vars Command % / 1000 Unsigned
No Load I Scalar None / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Field Cur Amps / 10000 Unsigned
Manual Ids Demand % / 1000 Unsigned
Avg Ids Ref Amps /10000 Unsigned
ControlNet Communication
10.3 Parameter Assignment/Addressing
NXGpro Communication
218 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
10.4 Planning/Configuring
This section describes the setup methods available for communication. The following topics
are explained:
● Fast setup procedures
● PLC setup
● Network setup procedure
● Network status detection
● An example to illustrate the setup procedure.
Note
Fast setup procedures allow setup of a Network 1 interface with a minimum of detail.
10.4.1 Fast Setup: Control the drive using the default configuration
To control the drive using the default configuration, you must send commands to the drive's
'fixed reg bits' location. This location is register 'Data to Drive 01' as provided in
Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in
Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing.
To control the drive from a PLC using the default configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".
2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "Fixed". This sets the bits at register 'Data to
Drive 01' where the fixed register bits are located. The fixed register bits are interpreted as
shown in the following table.
4. Add the following line to the SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
Table 10-20 Default definitions of Fixed Register Bits
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit0_I Run forward
Network1FixedRegBit1_I Run reverse
Network1FixedRegBit2_I Fault reset
Network1FixedRegBit3_I Stop1
Network1FixedRegBit4_I Reserved
Network1FixedRegBit5_I Start stop control from network
Network1FixedRegBit6_I Speed commanded from network
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 219
Bit Default Definition
Network1FixedRegBit7_I
Reserved for future assignment
Network1FixedRegBit8_I
Network1FixedRegBit9_I
Network1FixedRegBit10_I
Network1FixedRegBit11_I
Network1FixedRegBit12_I
Network1FixedRegBit13_I
Network1FixedRegBit14_I
Network1FixedRegBit15_I
1 Network1FixedRegBit3_I functions as a drive stop control bit only if parameter 'Start Stop Control'
(9945) is set to "Momentary". Otherwise this bit is reserved.
Note
To run the drive, the PLC must send 0x21 to register 'Data to Drive 01'. This hexadecimal value
sets bit 0 (run) and bit 5 (start/stop control from network).
To stop the drive, the PLC must send 0x08 or 0x00 to register 'Data to Drive 01'.
10.4.2 Fast Setup: Monitor drive status and speed feedback
To read status data from the drive, complete the following steps:
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".
2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units.
4. Refer to the Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication
Protocol Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to obtain the addresses for
general status (Data from Drive 01) and motor speed feedback (Data from Drive 02) from
the drive.
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
220 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
The general drive status bits found in register 'Data from Drive 01' are defined in the following
table.
Table 10-21 Default definitions of General Status Bits
Bit number Meaning in drive control soft‐
ware
Value
0 Fault
0 = False; 1 = True
1 Alarm
2 RunningForward
3 RunningReverse
4 DriveReady
5 StartStopControlFromNetwork
6 SpeedFromNetwork
7 AtSpeedReference
8 SpeedInPercent
9 SpeedInRPM
10 SpeedInHz
11 Reserved for future use
12 Reserved for future use
13 Reserved for future use
14 Reserved for future use
15 Reserved for future use
Note
You cannot reprogram the drive's default interpretation of output bits.
Refer to Network Setup Procedure for details on how to read other drive data.
See also
Network Setup Procedure (Page 223)
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 221
10.4.3 Fast Setup: Send a motor speed setting to the drive
1. Using parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080), set the desired speed units to be sent to the drive,
to one of the following options:
– %
– RPM
– Hertz
2. The PLC needs to send the desired speed setting to the drive in register 'Data to Drive 02' .
This register is reserved to hold speed settings only, as noted in Table Correspondence
between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address in Section Parameter
Assignment/Addressing.
3. Send 0x61 in register 'Data to Drive 01' . The motor now accepts the speed setting from the
PLC.
10.4.4 Fast Setup: Control the drive using user-defined bits controlled by the SOP
To control the drive using non-default configuration, you must redefine the fixed register bits at
register 'Data to Drive 01'.
Note
The 'fixed reg bits' location is fixed at register 'Data to Drive 01', whether the default
configuration is used or not.
You cannot reprogram the 'fixed reg bits' location.
You can reprogram the definition of the bits at this address.
To control the drive this way, complete the following steps.
1. Set parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901) to "ControlNet".
2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Set parameter 'Net Control Type' (9944) to "SOP". This makes the definitions of the fixed
register bits in register 'Data to Drive 01' programmable.
4. Next, set up the drive to correspond with the bits you want to use in the SOP. Refer to
Section Software Programming to find the bits and locate the associated keypad pick list
variable, and use the procedures detailed in this section to complete set up.
5. To enable speed settings from the network, add the following line to the SOP file:
RawDemandNetwork1_O = true;
See also
Software Programming (Page 205)
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
222 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
10.4.5 PLC Setup using EDS files
Overview
An EDS file is a device description file in a specified format. The format must conform to the
ControlNet™ Trade Organization (CTO) guidelines. Contact Siemens customer service for
EDS files.
Each device on the ControlNet™ network must have an EDS file. The EDS file provides all
relevant data associated with a specific device for use by the configuration tool.
● To communicate with the drive, you must configure the ControlNet™ master to have 136
input bytes and 136 output bytes.
10.4.6 Network Setup Procedure
Note
Setup functions are contained in the Configure Parameters Menu (9902), which is a submenu
of the Communications Menu (9).
Access is security-controlled at level 7; you must enter the security code to access these
parameters.
Refer to the NXGpro Control Operating Manual for further information on security access levels
and codes.
Use the following procedure to complete network setup. Refer to Table Configure Parameters
Menu (9902) in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the menus needed to complete
setup.
Procedure
1. Select a protocol using parameter 'Network 1 Type' (9901). Scroll to "ControlNet" and press
[ENTER]. The ControlNet™ configuration parameters are viewable.
2. Set parameter 'ControlNet Address' (9903) to the desired network address for the drive.
3. Some networks require a 4-byte header in the data from the drive. To use this, set parameter
'ControlNet Header' (9956) to "On".
4. Set parameter 'Velocity Units' (9080) to the desired motor speed units for motor
commanded speed and motor feedback speed scaling.
5. Where necessary, set parameter 'Demand Scalar' (9912) to:
n x commanded speed where –125 % to 125 %
6. Set parameter 'Aux Demand Scalar' (9913) if used.
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 223
7. Use Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to program the drive to send data to
and receive commands from the network. The table provides all available registers with
corresponding parameter ID as well as pre-programmed registers, which provide basic
drive send and receive functionality and are not changeable.
8. Define the bits in the available registers using one of the following methods:
● Enter from a choice of variables in the pick lists. The pick lists in the menus contain the most
commonly used data variables. Refer to Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing for the
pick lists.
Note
A pick list item can only be used once for each 'Data to Drive' register.
● For 'Data from Drive' registers, choose pick list option "Man Id" (manual ID) to manually
enter a variable that is not included in the pick lists, using the output data ID number. Use
the list of data IDs available in Appendix Output Data IDs to locate the variable and use the
corresponding ID number to enter the variable into the 'Data from Drive' register.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
● Custom program using the drive's SOP. Refer to Section Software Programming for details.
Note
The PLC can receive data from the drive without any changes to the SOP.
Only if you need to control the drive through the network will you need to set any flags in the
SOP.
See also
Software Programming (Page 205)
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 209)
Parameter Tables (Page 211)
Pick List Variable Tables (Page 213)
Output Data IDs (Page 263)
Set flags in the SOP for drive control through a network
Ensure the SOP file has the necessary code to enable control of the drive over a network:
1. To control the drive through a network by sending commands to the drive, the following
network control flag must be in the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network1RunEnable_O = TRUE;
2. To control the drive through a second network, the following network control flag must be in
the source code of the drive's SOP:
Network2RunEnable_O = TRUE;
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
224 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
10.4.7 Network Status (auto detect)
An SOP flag is available to show the network status:
● For network 1: Network1CommOk_I
● For network 2: Network2CommOk_I
The SOP flag is set to "1" (true) when the network connection is operating normally, and "0"
(false) when it is not operating normally.
The network status is automatically detected. Detection time takes approximately 20-40
milliseconds.
If a longer network timeout is desired for a network that automatically detects the network
status, it must be implemented through SOP logic.
10.4.8 Setup Example
Task
Set up network to indicate the following drive outputs on the PLC:
● general status
● motor speed
● output power
● number of active faults.
Procedure
Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address in Section Parameter Assignment/Addressing to establish whether an address or
register is changeable.
To indicate general status and motor speed:
1. The table shows that:
● 'Data from Drive 01' is not changeable; it is set to indicate general status. No action is
required.
● 'Data from Drive 02' is not changeable; it is set to indicate motor speed. No action is required.
To indicate output power:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 03' is changeable, this can be set to indicate output
power.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9403.
3. Enter parameter ID 9403.
4. Choose "output power" from the pick list.
The output power will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 03'.
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 225
To indicate the number of active faults:
1. The table shows that 'Data from Drive 04' is changeable, this can be set to indicate the
number of active faults.
2. Refer to Table Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol
Address to determine that the corresponding parameter ID is 9404.
3. Enter parameter ID 9404.
4. The pick list of data from drive variables appears. As "number of active faults" is not an
option in the pick list, you must specify it manually.
5. Refer to Table Data From Drive Pick List Variables in Section Parameter Assignment/
Addressing for a list of 'data from drive' pick list variables.
Since "number of active faults" is not a choice in the pick list, instead choose "Man Id"
(manual ID). The display shows "ManId-0000".
6. Refer to Appendix Output Data IDs and locate "number of active faults" in the tables to
determine its data ID number (3000).
7. Use arrow or number keys to enter 3000, and press [ENTER]. The display now shows
"ManId-3000".
The number of active faults will be sent to the PLC using register 'Data from Drive 04'.
● If the data ID number is not found, the error message "Invalid Id Entered" is displayed.
Ensure that the data ID is correct.
Table 10-22 Completed Settings for Given Example
PLC Address or Register Data Scaling
Data from Drive 01 (not changeable) General status 16 bits
Data from Drive 02 (not changeable) Motor speed RPM
Data from Drive 03 Output power kW
Data from Drive 04 Number of faults 0 to 128
See also
Correspondence between Drive Parameter ID and Communication Protocol Address
(Page 209)
ControlNet Communication
10.4 Planning/Configuring
NXGpro Communication
226 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces 11
11.1 Purpose
The HMI (Human Machine Interface) provides a local and a read-only HMI interface capable of
the monitoring of relevant VFD data. The local interface also allows for the changing of
parameters, and control of the VFD through custom SOP implementation. Both connections act
as servers utilizing the Ethernet Modbus™ protocol.
11.2 Remote Connection (Anybus Network #3)
The Remote HMI connection is considered 'read only' at all times. This interface only allows
reading from the event log, the fault information, the real time data, and parameters from the
VFD. This interface must be enabled through the VFD menu system which can be accessed
either through the keypad or through the ToolSuite software. Communications parameters
relevant to Network 3 in the Communications Menu must be properly configured to enable
communication. Proper configuration is realized by setting up the IP address, subnet, and
gateway address if required, along with setting the remote interface to "Enabled". The port for
connection is always 502 and cannot be changed.
The Remote HMI interface communicates relevant data through pages of 256 Register Data
defined by the Memory map below. The data being received will depend on the pages as
selected by the Data Request Registers or DRR’s (Registers 40257 – DRR0 and 40258 –
DRR1). The default setting of these registers is 0 and 0 which will result in the return of the first
256 items in the Memory Map upon request. To increment through the pages, increment the
value of DRR1 by one at a time, up to 0x0003 (4 total pages). Each increment of DRR1 will call
for the next 256 data sets from the memory map to be loaded into the Holding registers for read
by a client. In the event the end of the data pages section is passed, all registers will be returned
with values 0xFFFF. It is also recommended that a heartbeat be provided at register 40259 to
ensure continuity of your connection.
The fault section of data pages can be loaded by setting the value of DRR0 to 0x0001. It is
recommended that whenever DRR0 is incremented, DRR1 be returned to 0x0000 to start at the
first page of the data being requested. The fault data is split into 9 pages of data that will only
actually fill the first 252 registers of the 256 total available registers. Please see the memory
map for a detailed description on how the fault information is passed.
By starting with DRR0 = 0x0001 and DRR1 = 0x0000, you can then increment DRR1 by 1 per
read, up to 0x0008 to receive the entirety of the fault information. If you exceed the highest page
value determined by the number of faults available, the interface will continue to return the
highest valid page of the fault log available. Once repeating data is shown after an increment
of DRR1, this is an indication that the complete fault data has been read.
The Event Log section of data pages can be loaded by setting the value of DRR0 to 0x0002.
Again, it is recommended that any time DRR0 is incremented, DRR1 be reset to 0x0000. The
event log will be read in pages of 256 registers (as with the other data pages) with two
characters filling each register, that is, each page of the Fault Log will contain 512 ASCII
characters pulled directly from the event log. The number of available pages is completely
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 227
dependent on the size of the current event log. Reads of the 256 registers, and increments of
DRR1 should be performed until several registers filled with 0xFFFF are seen, this marks the
end of the event log data. For an updated event log, DRR0 can be reset to 0x0000 after multiple
reads/increments have been performed.
Table 11-1 Remote HMI Interface Parameters
Name Text
Length
Type Location ID Security
Level
Tool
Configuration
Run
Change
Default
Value
Network 3
Configure
19 M B 9980 7 Y Y ---
IP
Address
10 P B 9981 7 Y Y -1408232431
Subnet
Mask
11 P B 9982 7 Y Y -65536
Gateway
Address
15 P B 9983 7 Y Y -1408171775
Picklist
Name Text
Length
Type Location ID Security
Level
Tool
Configuration
Run
Change
Default
Value
Values
Enable
Remote
Interface
23 PL B 9984 7 Y Y Disabled Disabled
Enabled
Enable
Local HMI
16 PL B 9985 7 Y Y Disabled Disabled
Read-Only
Read/Write
11.3 Remote Connection Security
The remote connection (Network #3) is a standard fieldbus protocol. Standard fieldbus
protocols are not encrypted and should be protected with hardening or other measures as part
of a defense in depth strategy For further information go to https://www.siemens.com/
industrialsecurity.
To obtain information regarding secure application of the SINAMICS Perfect Harmony™
GH180, refer to the "Operating the Software" section of the NXGpro Control Manual,
A5E33474566 that is shipped with your drive.
See also
Security information (Page 15)
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces
11.3 Remote Connection Security
NXGpro Communication
228 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
11.4 Local Connection (CPU Ethernet)
The Local HMI interface functions much in the same way as the Remote HMI interface. The
local interface uses the IP settings of the VFD (set through the keypad or ToolSuite) and
functions as an Ethernet Modbus server. The local interface must however be enabled in the
communications menu. The local interface will always operate on port 503.
The main differences between the local and remote interfaces are:
● the local interface allows for much larger pages sizes per DRR1 request (1034 registers)
● the local interface allows for setting of parameters and control of the VFD through custom
SOP implementation
The same functionality as the remote interface is utilized for selecting the data to be read
except:
● DRR0 is at register 41035
● DRR1 is at register 41036
● pages are much larger (1024 registers of data, another 10 registers at the end for
configurable parameter displays – more description of the configurable parameter registers
is below).
For receiving standard drive data at DRR0 = 0x0000, no increments of DRR1 are required. All
relevant drive data is loaded into a set of 1024 holding registers to be read by the client.
As with the remote interface, when DRR0 = 0x0001, the 1024 holding registers will be loaded
with fault data. When DRR0 = 0x0002, the 1024 holding registers are loaded with the ASCII
representation of the event log, with two ASCII characters per register.
The write area of the local interface begins with the DRR Registers at 41035 and 41036. These
registers can be set at any time and function in the same way as the DRR’s in the remote
interface. The next set of registers in the write area, up to register 41142, will require that
register 41037 be set with a specific "Handshake" value, and that register 41028 be provided
with a heartbeat. Lack of a heartbeat for 5 seconds will result in disconnect being indicated. In
addition, lack of a "Handshake" value will force a read only state and will not allow data to be
written.
A parameter enabling read/write will also need to be set in the communications menu to allow
for a read/write interface. This allows the user to disable the local write interface iif ever
required, regardless of whether or not the proper permissions on the write interface have been
met.
For information on configuration to produce the required "Handshake" value required by the
write interface, please contact Siemens . As this information is relevant to the security of the
connection, a non-disclosure agreement may be requested prior to providing this information.
It is also recommended that the handshake value be reset to 0x0000 when the write side of the
interface is not in use. The majority of the required registers for commissioning are contained
within registers 41044 through 41122. The parameter that will be changed by altering the value
of these registers are shown on the memory map. Simply send a value per the description/units
section of the memory map to the appropriate register to set a parameter. Please note, if
description/unit states picklist, you must consult the control manual (supplied with your drive)
for a definition of the allowable picklist items which will be translated as an integer value 0 – X
where X is the last item in the picklist.
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces
11.4 Local Connection (CPU Ethernet)
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 229
HMI Control
Control from the local HMI interface must be implemented through the SOP. A speed demand
register at 41039 and a set of 64 SOP flags have been included in the interface to allow the
changing of SOP bits through registers 41040 – 41043. By setting bit field values to these
registers, the state of the SOP flags can be changed; and if implemented in the SOP, can be
used to perform any relevant actions that could be triggered through the SOP (for example start
and stop of the system).
Note
Correct Configuration of HMI Flags
Locall HMI interface must be implemented through the SOP by setting bit field values to
registers 41040 – 41043. These flags will perform NO actions if not set up in the SOP.
Configurable Registers
Although the common registers used for commissioning are directly available at the write
interface of the local HMI connection, other parameters may need to be set from this interface.
Therefore, a set of 10 configurable registers are mplemented.
The configurable registers work as follows:
A valid parameter ID not representing a function is provided to one of the configurable registers
at 41123 – 41132. The requested parameter value of the parameter ID sent to these registers
can be read at 41025 – 41034. These relate in a 1:1 manner, that is. if parameter ID is sent to
41122, the value of this parameter can be read back at 41025. The value of the requested
parameter IDs can then be set at registers 41133 – 41142, and again, will relate in a 1:1
manner. So the first requested parameter ID set at 41123, can be read back at 41025, and can
be set at 41133. This part of the write interface allows for the setting of any requested register
beyond the standard registers listed in the memory map. The same rules apply for setting these
parameters but the control manual must be consulted for any requested parameters to properly
set the value of the parameter at the interface. Invalid values will not be accepted and will show
no change when read back if an invalid value was provided.
Note
In implementation, you can cyclically set and read the configurable parameters to provide a
read out of all parameter values beyond what is listed by standard in the read side of the
memory map.
11.5 Memory Map HMI Data To Drive
The memory map HMI data to the drive is contained in document A5E46766611A.
See also
Remote Connection (Anybus Network #3) (Page 227)
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces
11.5 Memory Map HMI Data To Drive
NXGpro Communication
230 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
11.6 Memory Map HMI Data From Drive
The memory map HMI data from the drive is contained in document A5E46766611A.
See also
Remote Connection (Anybus Network #3) (Page 227)
11.7 Memory Map DTA Data From Drive
The HMI memory map DTA data from the drive is contained in document A5E46766611A.
See also
Remote Connection (Anybus Network #3) (Page 227)
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces
11.7 Memory Map DTA Data From Drive
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 231
Local HMI and Remote HMI Interfaces
11.7 Memory Map DTA Data From Drive
NXGpro Communication
232 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs A
The following table lists the drive menu parameters that are pick list types, and their associated
values. For a description of each of the menu parameters, refer to the NXGpro Control
Operating Manual, Chapter Parameter Assignment / Addressing.
Table A-1 Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
1110 Sync motor select 0 No
1 Yes
1130 Overload select 0 Constant
1 Straight inverse time
2 Inverse time with speed derating
1180 Underload enable 0 Disable
1 Enable
1247 H/W Ground Fault Enable 0 No
1 Yes
1248 Peak Reduction Enable 0 VFD volt rating
1 Mot volt rating
1320 Encoder loss response 0 stop (fault)
1 Open loop
1330 Low speed operation 0 Disable
1 Enable
2050 Control loop type 0 Volts per Hertz
1 Open Loop Vector Control
2 Closed Loop Vector Control
3 Open Loop Test Mode
4 Synch Motor Control
5 Closed Loop Synch Motor Control
6 Synch Motor DC Exciter
7 Permanent Magnet Motor
2051 Parallel system 0 Disable
1 Enable
2211 Sop / Menu control 0 Sop flag
1 Menu
2430 Spinning load mode 0 Off
1 Forward
2 Reverse
3 Both
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 233
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
2550 Cell Voltage 0 460
1 630
2 690
3 750 Gen IV
4 1375 HV
5 600 AP AFE
6 750 V AP
7 750 V AP 4Q
2584 AP cell PWM harmonic 0 13th
1 15th
2 17th
3 19th
4 23rd
5 25th
6 27th
7 29th
2586 AP cell control mode 0 DQ
1 QD
2 Q only
3 Free run DQ
4 Free run QD
5 Free run Q only
2590 Bypass type 0 Mech
1 None
2597 AP Mplx Data Select 0 Manual Value
1 Air Temp
2 Inlet Temp
3 Outlet Temp
4 Cur Cmd Lmt
5 Id Dmd
6 Iq Dmd
7 VA
8 VB
9 VC
10 DC Reg Out
11 VD Limit Diff
12 I Out (Spare)
13 I Cap (Spare)
14 I Cap (Spare)
15 Theta Difference
16 PWM Fund Harm
17 PWM Period
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
234 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
2600 Fast bypass 0 Disable
1 Manual
2626 DC Bus Reference 0 100 %
1 101 %
2 102 %
3 103 %
4 104 %
5 105 %
2630 Neutral connection 0 T2
1 T1
2635 Precharge Enable 0 Off
1 Type 1 HV 3 CB
2 Type 2 HV 2 CB
3 Type 3 Parallel Drv
4 Type 4 (Not used)
5 Type 5 Open WC3
6 Type 6 Closed WC3
2637 Precharge Service Mode 0 Off
1 On
2638 Precharge Service Start 0 Stop
1 Start
2816 Type (Int Analog 1) 0 0 – 20 mA
1 4 – 20 mA
2 0 – 10 V
2826 Type (Int Analog 2) 0 0 – 20 mA
1 4 – 20 mA
2 0 – 10 V
2836 Type (Int Analog 3) 0 0 – 20 mA
1 4 – 20 mA
2 0 – 10 V
2846 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal
Analog Outputs
2848 Output Mode (Int Analog Out1) 0 4 – 20 mA
1 0 - 20 mA
2856 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal
Analog Outputs
2858 Output Mode (Int Analog Out2) 0 4 – 20 mA
1 0 - 20 mA
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 235
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
2861 Analog variable (Int Test Point #28) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal
Test Points 2866 Analog variable (Int Test Point #29)
2871 Analog variable (Int Test Point #31)
2876 Analog variable (Int Test Point #24)
2881 Analog variable (Int Test Point #25)
2886 Analog variable (Int Test Point #26)
2961 Enable high torque 0 Disable
1 Enable
2971 Enable watchdog 0 Disable
1 Enable
2981 Reactive Current mode 0 Disable
1 Manual
2 Auto
3 Manual network
3310 Stator resistance estimator 0 Off
1 On
3360 Enable braking 0 Off
1 On
3470 Test type (Control loop test) 0 Speed
1 Torque
4105 Source (Analog input #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4110 Type (Analog input #1) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4150 Loss of signal action (Analog input #1) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4175 Source (Analog input #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4180 Type (Analog input #2) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4220 Loss of signal action (Analog input #2) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4233 Source (Analog input #3) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
236 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4234 Type (Analog input #3) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4238 Loss of signal action (Analog input #3) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4333 Source (Analog input #4) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4334 Type (Analog input #4) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4338 Loss of signal action (Analog input #4) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4342 Source (Analog input #5) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4343 Type (Analog input #5) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4347 Loss of signal action (Analog input #5) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4412 Comp 17 A in variable (Comparator 17
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4413 Comp 17 B in variable (Comparator 17
setup)
4416 Compare 17 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4418 Comp 18 A in variable (Comparator 18
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4419 Comp 18 B in variable (Comparator 18
setup)
4422 Compare 18 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4424 Comp 19 A in variable (Comparator 19
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4425 Comp 19 B in variable (Comparator 19
setup)
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 237
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4428 Compare 19 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4430 Comp 20 A in variable (Comparator 20
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4431 Comp 20 B in variable (Comparator 20
setup)
4434 Compare 20 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4436 Comp 21 A in variable (Comparator 21
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4437 Comp 21 B in variable (Comparator 21
setup)
4440 Compare 21 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4442 Comp 22 A in variable (Comparator 22
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4443 Comp 22 B in variable (Comparator 22
setup)
4446 Compare 22 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4448 Comp 23 A in variable (Comparator 23
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4449 Comp 23 B in variable (Comparator 23
setup)
4452 Compare 23 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4454 Comp 24 A in variable (Comparator 24
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4455 Comp 24 B in variable (Comparator 24
setup)
4458 Compare 24 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4460 Comp 25 A in variable (Comparator 25
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4461 Comp 25 B in variable (Comparator 25
setup)
4464 Compare 25 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
238 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4466 Comp 26 A in variable (Comparator 26
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4467 Comp 26 B in variable (Comparator 26
setup)
4470 Compare 26 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4472 Comp 27 A in variable (Comparator 27
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4473 Comp 27 B in variable (Comparator 27
setup)
4476 Compare 27 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4478 Comp 28 A in variable (Comparator 28
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4479 Comp 28 B in variable (Comparator 28
setup)
4482 Compare 28 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4484 Comp 29 A in variable (Comparator 29
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4485 Comp 29 B in variable (Comparator 29
setup)
4488 Compare 29 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4490 Comp 30 A in variable (Comparator 30
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4491 Comp 30 B in variable (Comparator 30
setup)
4494 Compare 30 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4497 Comp 31 A in variable (Comparator 31
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4498 Comp 31 B in variable (Comparator 31
setup)
4501 Compare 31 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4503 Comp 32 A in variable (Comparator 32
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4504 Comp 32 B in variable (Comparator 32
setup)
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 239
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4507 Compare 32 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4510 Source (Auxiliary input #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4520 Type (Auxiliary input #1) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4560 Loss of signal action (Auxiliary input #1) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4590 Source (Auxiliary input #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Inputs
4600 Type (Auxiliary input #2) 0 0 to 20 mA
1 4 to 30 mA
2 0 to 10 V
3 -10 to +10 V
4640 Loss of signal action (Auxiliary input #2) 0 Preset
1 Maintain
2 Stop
4662 Source (Analog output #1) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4663 Output module type (Analog output #1) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4666 Source (Analog output #2) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4667 Output module type (Analog output #2) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4670 Source (Analog output #3) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4671 Output module type (Analog output #3) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4674 Source (Analog output #4) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4675 Output module type (Analog output #4) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4678 Source (Analog output #5) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4679 Output module type (Analog output #5) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4682 Source (Analog output #6) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
240 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4683 Output module type (Analog output #6) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4686 Source (Analog output #7) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4687 Output module type (Analog output #7) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4690 Source (Analog output #8) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4691 Output module type (Analog output #8) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4694 Source (Analog output #9) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4695 Output module type (Analog output #9) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4698 Source (Analog output #10) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4699 Output module type (Analog output #10) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4702 Source (Analog output #11) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4703 Output module type (Analog output #11) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4706 Source (Analog output #12) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4707 Output module type (Analog output #12) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4710 Source (Analog output #13) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4711 Output module type (Analog output #13) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4714 Source (Analog output #14) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4715 Output module type (Analog output #14) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4718 Source (Analog output #15) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4719 Output module type (Analog output #15) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
4722 Source (Analog output #16) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External
Analog Outputs
4723 Output module type (Analog output #16) 0 Unipolar
1 Bipolar
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 241
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4811 Comp 1 A in variable (Comparator 1 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4812 Comp 1 B in variable (Comparator 1 set‐
up)
4815 Compare 1 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4821 Comp 2 A in variable (Comparator 2 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4822 Comp 2 B in variable (Comparator 2 set‐
up)
4825 Compare 2 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4831 Comp 3 A in variable (Comparator 3 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4832 Comp 3 B in variable (Comparator 3 set‐
up)
4835 Compare 3 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4841 Comp 4 A in variable (Comparator 4 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4842 Comp 4 B in variable (Comparator 4 set‐
up)
4845 Compare 4 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4851 Comp 5 A in variable (Comparator 5 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4852 Comp 5 B in variable (Comparator 5 set‐
up)
4855 Compare 5 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4861 Comp 6 A in variable (Comparator 6 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4862 Comp 6 B in variable (Comparator 6 set‐
up)
4865 Compare 6 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4871 Comp 7 A in variable (Comparator 7 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4872 Comp 7 B in variable (Comparator 7 set‐
up)
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
242 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4875 Compare 7 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4881 Comp 8 A in variable (Comparator 8 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4882 Comp 8 B in variable (Comparator 8 set‐
up)
4885 Compare 8 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4891 Comp 9 A in variable (Comparator 9 set‐
up)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4892 Comp 9 B in variable (Comparator 9 set‐
up)
4895 Compare 9 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4901 Comp 10 A in variable (Comparator 10
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4902 Comp 10 B in variable (Comparator 10
setup)
4905 Compare 10 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4911 Comp 11 A in variable (Comparator 11
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4912 Comp 11 B in variable (Comparator 11
setup)
4915 Compare 11 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4921 Comp 12 A in variable (Comparator 12
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4922 Comp 12 B in variable (Comparator 12
setup)
4925 Compare 12 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4931 Comp 13 A in variable (Comparator 13
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4932 Comp 13 B in variable (Comparator 13
setup)
4935 Compare 13 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 243
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4941 Comp 14 A in variable (Comparator 14
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4942 Comp 14 B in variable (Comparator 14
setup)
4945 Compare 14 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4951 Comp 15 A in variable (Comparator 15
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4952 Comp 15 B in variable (Comparator 15
setup)
4955 Compare 15 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
4961 Comp 16 A in variable (Comparator 16
setup)
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Compa‐
rators
4962 Comp 16 B in variable (Comparator 16
setup)
4965 Compare 16 type 0 Off
1 Signed compare
2 Magnitude compare
5070 Show differences 0 No
1 Yes
5080 Select language 0 English
1 Italian
2 Spanish
3 French
4 Portuguese
5 German
6 Chinese
7 Russian
5081 Select language 0 English
1 Italian
2 Spanish
3 French
4 Portuguese
5 German
6 Chinese
7 Russian
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
244 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
5201 Dummy for line 1 0 FRST
1 TLIM
2 SPHS
3 UVLT
4 T OL
5 F WK
6 C OL
7 NET1
8 NET2
9 ALIM
10 EALM
11 ENLM
12 EMLM
13 CIMB
14 RLBK
15 RGEN
16 BRKG
17 OVLT
18 BYPS
19 PRCH
20 OLTM
21 MODE
22 CURP
5202 Dummy for line 2 0 NOMV
1 INH
2 OFF
3 MAGN
4 SPIN
5 UXFR
6 DXFR
7 KYPD
8 TEST
9 LOS
10 NET1
11 NET2
12 AUTO
13 HAND
14 BRAK
15 DECL
16 COAS
17 TUNE
18 FALT
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 245
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
6255 Store In Event Log (Historic Log) 0 Off
1 On
6260 Historic log variable 1 Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Historic
Log Variables 6270 Historic log variable 2
6280 Historic log variable 3
6290 Historic log variable 4
6300 Historic log variable 5
6310 Historic log variable 6
6320 Historic log variable 7
7050 Transformer tap setting (input protect) 0 -5 %
1 0 %
2 +5 %
3 +10 %
7120 Auto reset enable (input protect) 0 No
1 Yes
8001 Status Variable 1 (Meter menu) Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Meter
Status Variables 8002 Status Variable 2 (Meter menu)
8003 Status Variable 3 (Meter menu)
8004 Status Variable 4 (Meter menu)
8005 Status Variable 5 (Meter menu)
8006 Status Variable 6 (Meter menu)
8007 Status Variable 7 (Meter menu)
8130 Output units (Hour Meter Setup) 0 English
1 Metric
8150 Selection for HA (Input harmonics) 0 IA
1 IB
2 IC
3 VA
4 VB
5 VC
8200 Fault display override 0 Off
1 On
9020 Serial port use 0 Local
1 Modem
2 Remote
9030 Flow Control (Serial port use) 0 None
1 Xon/Xoff
9040 Baud rate (Serial port use) 0 9600
1 19200
2 38400
3 57600
4 115200
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
246 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9047 Modbus Parity [Network 1] 0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
9048 Modbus Stop Bits [Network 1] 0 One
1 Two
9060 Modbus Baud Rate [Network 1] 0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600
4 19200
9080 Velocity Units [Network 1] 0 Percent
1 RPM
2 Hertz
9185 Multiple config files 0 OFF
1 ON
9201 to 9232 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 1 Global
Data]
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive
Communication Lists
9234 to 9265 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 2 Global
Data]
9401 to 9464 Data From Drive 01 - 64 [Network 1 Reg‐
ister Data]
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From
Drive Communication Lists
9501 to 9564 Data From Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Reg‐
ister Data]
9601 to 9664 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 1 Register
Data]
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive
Communication Lists
9701 to 9764 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register
Data]
9801 to 9832 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 1 Glob‐
al Data]
Refer to Table Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From
Drive Communication Lists
9834 to 9865 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 2 Glob‐
al Data]
9901 Network 1 Type (Network 1 Configure) 0 None
1 Modbus
2 DeviceNet
3 ProfiBus
5 Ethernet Modbus
7 ControlNet
9905 DeviceNet Baud Rate [Network 1] 0 125 K
1 250 K
2 500 K
9911 Data Type [Network 1] 0 Integer
1 Raw data
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 247
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9915 Network 2 Type (Network 2 Configure) 0 None
1 Modbus
2 DeviceNet
3 ProfiBus
5 Ethernet Modbus
7 ControlNet
9917 Modbus Baud Rate [Network 2] 0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600
4 19200
9919 DeviceNet Baud Rate [Network 2] 0 125 K
1 250 K
2 500 K
9924 Velocity Units [Network 2] 0 Percent
1 RPM
2 Hertz
9925 Data Type [Network 2] 0 Integer
1 Raw data
9928 Status / Control 0 Sop
1 Fixed
9929 Status / Control 0 Sop
1 Fixed
9944 Net Control Type 0 Sop
1 Fixed
9945 Start Stop Control 0 Maintained
1 Momentary
9947 Modbus Parity [Network 2] 0 None
1 Odd
2 Even
9948 Modbus Stop Bits [Network 2] 0 One
1 Two
9951 Network 1 I/O Size 0 136 Bytes In/Out
1 128 Bytes In/Out
2 96 Bytes In/Out
3 32 Bytes In/Out
4 16 Bytes In/Out
9952 Network 2 I/O Size 0 136 Bytes In/Out
1 128 Bytes In/Out
2 96 Bytes In/Out
3 32 Bytes In/Out
4 16 Bytes In/Out
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
NXGpro Communication
248 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9953 Net 1 Swap Bytes [Profibus] 0 Off
1 On
9954 Net 2 Swap Bytes [Profibus] 0 Off
1 On
9956 Control Net Header [Network 1] 0 Off
1 On
9957 Control Net Header [Network 2] 0 Off
1 On
9958 Telegram Number [Network 1] 0 1 1 2 2 30
3 352
4 999
5 998
9959 Telegram Number [Network 2] 0 1 1 2 2 30
3 352
4 999
5 998
A.1 Internal Analog Outputs
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Analog Outputs
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
2846 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 1) 0 Motor Voltage
2856 Analog variable (Int Analog Out 2) 1 Total Current
2 Average Power
3 Motor Speed
4 Speed Demand
5 Speed Reference
6 Raw Flux Demand
7 Flux Reference
8 Current (RMS)
9 Zero Sequence Av
10 Neg Sequence D
11 Neg Sequence Q
12 Input Frequency
13 Input Power Avg
14 Input Pwr Factor
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.1 Internal Analog Outputs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 249
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
15 Ah Harmonic
16 Bh Harmonic
17 Total Harmonics
18 Xfmr Therm Level
19 1 Cycle Protect
20 Single Phase Cur
21 Under Volt Limit
22 Out Neutral Volts
23 Synch Motor Field
24 Motor Torque
25 Encoder Speed
26 Analog Input #1
27 Analog Input #2
28 Analog Input #3
29 Analog Input #4
30 Analog Input #5
31 Analog Input #6
32 Analog Input #7
33 Analog Input #8
34 Input KVAR
35 Drive Losses
36 Excess React Current
37 Speed Droop Percent
38 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref
39 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb
40 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered
A.2 Internal Test Points
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Internal Test Points
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
2861 Analog variable (Int Test Point #28) 0
2866 Analog variable (Int Test Point #29) 1 Ids
2871 Analog variable (Int Test Point #31) 2 Iqs
2876 Analog variable (Int Test Point #24) 3 Ids reference
2881 Analog variable (Int Test Point #25) 4 Iqs reference
2886 Analog variable (Int Test Point #26) 5 Iqs reference filtered
6 Flux DS
7 Flux QS
8 Vds reference
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.2 Internal Test Points
NXGpro Communication
250 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9 Vqs reference
10 Output frequency
11 Slip frequency
12 Motor speed (frequency - slip)
13 Motor speed filtered
14 RLoss for braking
15 XLoss for braking
16 Field weakening limit
17 Dual Frequency Braking Limit
18 Maximum Current Limit
19 Minimum Current Limit
20 Iq gain
21 Ua reference
22 Ub reference
23 Uc reference
24 Uc reference
25 Flux Q loss filtered
26 Id loss filtered
27 Iq loss filtered
28 W loss
29 Ws filtered
30 Theta loss
31 Flux DS filtered
32 Ids filtered
33 Iqs filtered
34 Vd loss
35 Ids no load
36 Stator resistance
37 Wp reference
38 Output vector angle
39 Volt second phase A measurements
40 Volt second phase B measurements
41 Volt second phase C measurements
42 Ia current measurements
43 Ib current measurements
44 Ic current measurements
45 Ids measured current after synch filter (V/Hz)
46 Iqs measured current after synch filter (V/Hz)
47 Raw speed demand
48 Auxiliary demand before ramp
49 Auxiliary demand after ramp
50 Speed demand
51 Speed profile output
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.2 Internal Test Points
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 251
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
52 Critical speed avoidance output
53 Polarity change output
54 Minimum demand output
55 Ramp output
56 Speed demand at limit input
57 Speed reference
58 Raw flux demand
59 Flux ramp output
60 Energy saver output
61 Field weakening output
62 Flux reference
63 Id input current
64 Iq input current
65 Phase A input current
66 Phase B input current
67 Phase C input current
68 Phase A input voltage
69 Phase B input voltage
70 Phase C input voltage
71 Zero sequence average
72 Negative sequence D voltage
73 Negative sequence Q voltage
74 D voltage
75 Q voltage
76 Input frequency
77 Input power average (kilowatts)
78 Input power factor
79 Ah harmonic coefficient
80 Bh harmonic coefficient
81 Transformer thermal level
82 One cycle reactive current level
83 Single phasing current level
84 Under Voltage level
85 Input side flux
86 Line Flux Vector Angle
87 Output Neutral Voltage
88 Sync Motor Field Current
89 Encoder Speed
90 Motor Voltage
91 Output Power Average (kilowatts)
92 Phase A filter current
93 Phase B filter current
94 Phase C filter current
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.2 Internal Test Points
NXGpro Communication
252 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
95 Measured Phase A volts
96 Measured Phase B volts
97 Measured Phase C volts
98 Measured Output Neutral Voltage
99 Max Available Output Volts
100 Input Reactive Power (KVAR)
101 Drive Efficiency
102 Drive State
103 Up Transfer State
104 Down Transfer State
105 Drive Internal Losses
106 Excess Input Reactive Current
107 Speed Droop
108 Precharge State Variable
109 Precharge Voltage
110 Input Real Current
111 Input Reactive Current
112 AFE Reactive Current Reference
113 AFE Input Voltage Feed-forward
114 AFE Real Current Feed-forward
115 Input Id unfiltered
116 Input Iq unfiltered
117 AFE kVar
118 AFE kW
119 Maximum Demand Output
120 SMDC Mode state variable
121 Drive Loss Fault Limit
122 Torque ramp output
123 High Speed delay angle
124 Input Voltage Fundamental Magnitude
125 Disable Rollback active
126 Total Motor Current
127 Output Phase A Voltage RMS
128 Output Phase B Voltage RMS
129 Output Phase C Voltage RMS
130 Output Phase A Current RMS
131 Output Phase B Current RMS
132 Output Phase C Current RMS
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.2 Internal Test Points
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 253
A.3 External Analog Inputs
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Inputs
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4105 Source (Analog input #1) 0 Off
4175 Source (Analog input #2) 1 External 1
4223 Source (Analog input #3) 2 External 2
4333 Source (Analog input #4) 3 External 3
4342 Source (Analog input #5) 4 External 4
4510 Source (Auxiliary input #1) 5 External 5
4590 Source (Auxiliary input #2) 6 External 6
7 External 7
8 External 8
9 External 9
10 External 10
11 External 11
12 External 12
13 External 13
14 External 14
15 External 15
16 External 16
17 External 17
18 External 18
19 External 19
20 External 20
21 External 21
22 External 22
23 External 23
24 External 24
25 Int AI1
26 Int AI2
27 Int Ai3
A.4 External Analog Outputs
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for External Analog Outputs
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4662 Source (Analog output #1) 0 Motor Voltage
4666 Source (Analog output #2) 1 Total Current
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.4 External Analog Outputs
NXGpro Communication
254 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4670 Source (Analog output #3) 2 Average Power
4674 Source (Analog output #4) 3 Motor Speed
4678 Source (Analog output #5) 4 Speed Demand
4682 Source (Analog output #6) 5 Speed Reference
4686 Source (Analog output #7) 6 Raw Flux Demand
4690 Source (Analog output #8) 7 Flux Reference
4604 Source (Analog output #9) 8 Current (RMS)
4698 Source (Analog output #10) 9 Zero Sequence Av
4702 Source (Analog output #11) 10 Neg Sequence D
4706 Source (Analog output #12) 11 Neg Sequence Q
4710 Source (Analog output #13) 12 Input Frequency
4714 Source (Analog output #14) 13 Input Power Avg
4718 Source (Analog output #15) 14 Input Pwr Factor
4722 Source (Analog output #16) 15 Ah Harmonic
16 Bh Harmonic
17 Total Harmonics
18 Xfmr Therm Level
19 1 Cycle Protect
20 Single Phase Cur
21 Under Volt Limit
22 Out Neutral Volts
23 Synch Motor Field
24 Motor Torque
25 Encoder Speed
26 Analog Input #1
27 Analog Input #2
28 Analog Input #3
29 Analog Input #4
30 Analog Input #5
31 Analog Input #6
32 Analog Input #7
33 Analog Input #8
34 Input KVAR
35 Drive Losses
36 Excess React Current
37 Speed Droop Percent
38 Torq Current (Iqs) Ref
39 Torq Current (Iqs) Fb
40 Torq Current (IqsFilt) Filtered
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.4 External Analog Outputs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 255
A.5 Comparators
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Comparators
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
4811 Comp 1 A in variable 0 Manual Value
4812 Comp 1 B in variable 1 Anl 1
4821 Comp 2 A in variable 2 Anl 2
4822 Comp 2 B in variable 3 Anl 3
4831 Comp 3 A in variable 4 Anl 4
4832 Comp 3 B in variable 5 Anl 5
4841 Comp 4 A in variable 6 Anl 6
4842 Comp 4 B in variable 7 Anl 7
4851 Comp 5 A in variable 8 Anl 8
4852 Comp 5 B in variable 9 Anl 9
4861 Comp 6 A in variable 10 Anl 10
4862 Comp 6 B in variable 11 Anl 11
4871 Comp 7 A in variable 12 Anl 12
4872 Comp 7 B in variable 13 Anl 13
4881 Comp 8 A in variable 14 Anl 14
4882 Comp 8 B in variable 15 Anl 15
4891 Comp 9 A in variable 16 Anl 16
4892 Comp 9 B in variable 17 Anl 17
4901 Comp 10 A in variable 18 Anl 18
4902 Comp 10 B in variable 19 Anl 19
4911 Comp 11 A in variable 20 Anl 20
4912 Comp 11 B in variable 21 Anl 21
4921 Comp 12 A in variable 22 Anl 22
4922 Comp 12 B in variable 23 Anl 23
4931 Comp 13 A in variable 24 Anl 24
4932 Comp 13 B in variable 25 Mtr Spd
4941 Comp 14 A in variable 26 Mtr Cur
4942 Comp 14 B in variable 27 Max Avail Out Vlt
4951 Comp 15 A in variable 28 IdsRef
4952 Comp 15 B in variable 29 Ids
4961 Comp 16 A in variable 30 IqsRef
4962 Comp 16 B in variable 31 Iqs
32 Input Freq
33 Manual Id
34 Int AI1
35 Int AI2
36 Int AI3
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.5 Comparators
NXGpro Communication
256 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
A.6 Historic Log Variables
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Historic Log Variables
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
6260 Historic log variable 1 0 Motor speed
6270 Historic log variable 2 1 Speed Reference
6280 Historic log variable 3 2 Raw Speed Demand
6290 Historic log variable 4 3 Torque Current Command
6300 Historic log variable 5 4 Torque Current Feedback
6310 Historic log variable 6 5 Magnetizing Current Command
6320 Historic log variable 7 6 Magnetizing Current Feedback
7 Total Motor Current
8 Motor Voltage
9 Motor Flux
10 Line Voltage Available
11 Line Voltage RMS
12 Output Power
13 Output Neutral Volts
14 Total Input Current
15 Input Power
16 Input Frequency
17 Input KVAR
18 Excessive Drive Losses
19 Excessive Reactive Current
20 Speed Droop Percent
21 Output Frequency PU
A.7 Meter Status Variables
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for Meter Status Variables
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
8001 Status Variable 1 (Meter menu) 0 Mag current ref (A)
8002 Status Variable 2 (Meter menu) 1 Trq current ref (A)
8003 Status Variable 3 (Meter menu) 2 Flux DS (%)
8004 Status Variable 4 (Meter menu) 3 Flux QS (%)
8005 Status Variable 5 (Meter menu) 4 Vds reference (%)
8006 Status Variable 6 (Meter menu) 5 Vqs reference (%)
8007 Status Variable 7 (Meter menu) 6 Slip frequency (%)
7 Motor speed (%)
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.7 Meter Status Variables
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 257
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
8 Output Frequency (Hz)
9 Motor speed (RPM)
10 Motor voltage (V)
11 Mag current filtered (A)
12 Trq current filtered (A)
13 Motor current (A)
14 Torque out (%)
15 Output power (KW)
16 Stator resistance
17 Speed demand (%)
18 Speed reference (%)
19 Raw flux demand (%)
20 Flux reference (%)
21 Id input current (A)
22 Iq input current (A)
23 Phase A input current (A)
24 Phase B input current (A)
25 Phase C input current (A)
26 Total input current (A)
27 Phase A input voltage (V)
28 Phase B input voltage (V)
29 Phase C input voltage (V)
30 Zero sequence voltage (V)
31 Negative sequence D voltage (V)
32 Negative sequence Q voltage (V)
33 Input D voltage (V)
34 Input Q voltage (V)
35 Input voltage (V)
36 Input frequency (Hz)
37 Input power average (KW)
38 Input power factor (%)
39 Ah harmonic coefficient (%)
40 Bh harmonic coefficient (%)
41 Total A, B harmonics (%)
42 Transformer thermal level (%)
43 One cycle reactive current level (%)
44 Single phasing current level (%)
45 Under Voltage level (%)
46 Efficiency (%)
47 Total Harmonic Distortion (%)
48 Output Neutral Voltage (V)
49 Output Neutral Voltage (%)
50 Synch Motor Field Current (A)
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.7 Meter Status Variables
NXGpro Communication
258 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
51 Encoder Speed (%)
52 Encoder Speed (RPM)
53 Phase A filter current (A)
54 Phase B filter current (A)
55 Phase C filter current (A)
56 Measured Phase A volts (V)
57 Measured Phase B volts (V)
58 Measured Phase C volts (V)
59 Measured Output Neutral Voltage (V)
60 Max Avail Output Volts (%)
61 Input Avg Reactive Power (KVAR)
62 Excessive Drive Losses (KW)
63 Excessive Reactive current (A)
64 Up Transfer State value
65 Down Transfer State value
66 Speed Droop (%)
A.8 To Drive Communication
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for To Drive Communication
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9201 to 9232 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 1 Global Data] 0 Velocity Demand
9234 to 9265 Data To Drive 01 - 32 [Network 2 Global Data] 1 Auxiliary Demand
9601 to 9664 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 1 Register Data] 2 Net Input Flag 1
9701 to 9764 Data To Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register Data] 3 Net Input Flag 2
4 Net Input Flag 3
5 Net Input Flag 4
6 Ratio
7 Forward Max Lim
8 Reverse Max Lim
9 Forward Acc Time
10 Forward Dec Time
11 Reverse Acc Time
12 Reverse Dec Time
13 Net Input Pulse
14 Forward Min Lim
15 Reverse Min Lim
16 Torque Limit
17 MUX1 Id
18 MUX2 Id
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.8 To Drive Communication
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 259
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
19 MUX3 Id
20 MUX4 Id
21 MUX5 Id
22 MUX6 Id
23 MUX7 Id
24 MUX8 Id
25 PTD1
26 PTD2
27 PTD3
28 PTD4
29 Parallel Cmd 1
30 Torque Demand
31 PVCL Demand
32 Flux Demand
33 Node Count
34 Node Index
35 Torque Acc Time
36 Torque Dec Time
37 Torque Offset
38 Torque Scalar
39 Vars Command
40 No Load I Scalar
41 Avg Field Cur
42 Manual Ids Demand
A.9 From Drive Communication
Menu Parameter Pick List Values for From Drive Communication
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
9401 to 9464 Data From Drive 01 - 64 [Network 1 Register Data] 0 None
9501 to 9564 Data From Drive 01-64 [Network 2 Register Data] 1 Man Id
9801 to 9832 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 1 Global Data] 2 General Status
9834 to 9865 Data From Drive 01-32 [Network 2 Global Data] 3 Motor Voltage
4 Total Current
5 Output Power
6 Motor Speed
7 Speed Demand
8 Speed Reference
9 Heartbeat
10 Drive State
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.9 From Drive Communication
NXGpro Communication
260 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
11 Inp RMS Current
12 Input Frequency
13 Input Power Avg
14 Net1 Out Reg 1
15 Net1 Out Reg 2
16 Net1 Out Reg 3
17 Net1 Out Reg 4
18 Net2 Out Reg 1
19 Net2 Out Reg 2
20 Net2 Out Reg 3
21 Net2 Out Reg 4
22 Torque Current
23 Magnetizing Cur
24 Motor Flux
25 Motor Torque
26 Flux Reference
27 Input Voltage
28 Inp Power Factor
29 Input KVars
30 Max Available Output Volts
31 Hottest Cell Temp
32 Mux1 Echo
33 Mux1 Data
34 Mux2 Echo
35 Mux2 Data
36 Mux3 Echo
37 Mux3 Data
38 Mux4 Echo
39 Mux4 Data
40 Mux5 Echo
41 Mux5 Data
42 Mux6 Echo
43 Mux6 Data
44 Mux7 Echo
45 Mux7 Data
46 Mux8 Echo
47 Mux8 Data
48 Wago Inputs 1-16
49 Wago Inputs 17-32
50 Wago Inputs 33-48
51 Wago Inputs 49-64
52 Wago Inputs 65-80
53 Wago Inputs 81-96
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.9 From Drive Communication
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 261
ID Menu Text Value Pick List Text String
54 Wago Outputs 1-16
55 Wago Outputs 17-32
56 Wago Outputs 33-48
57 Wago Outputs 49-64
58 PFD1
59 PFD2
60 PFD3
61 PFD4
62 Drive Losses
63 Excessive Reactive Current
64 Speed Droop Percent
65 Sync Motor Field Ref
66 Avail Reactive Current
67 Drive Efficiency
Menu Parameter Pick List IDs
A.9 From Drive Communication
NXGpro Communication
262 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Output Data IDs B
B.1 Output data IDs
Overview
Use output data ID numbers to enter variables that are not listed or detailed in the pick list.
Note
The output data ID number is not the same as a parameter ID number.
Output data ID numbers for read commands are listed in the following tables:
● General data register assignments
● Serial Flags: The 64 available bits can be used with any other valid input or output bits, for
example, packing bits from multiple addresses into a single telegram.
● Network 1 and 2 Output flags
● WAGO™ inputs and outputs (I/O)
● Internal digital I/O
● Cell temperature
● Fault and Alarm
● All other data
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 263
General Data
Table B-1 General Data Register Assignments
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2000 RPM Speed reference command
2001 ● bit 0: Fault
● bit 1: Alarm
● bit 2: Running Forward
● bit 3: Running Reverse
● bit 4: Drive Ready
● bit 5: Start/Stop Control By Network
● bit 6: Speed Set By Network
● bit 7: At Speed Reference
● bit 8: Speed Is In Percent
● bit 9: Speed Is In RPM
● bit 10: Speed Is In Hz
● bit 11: not used
● bit 12: not used
● bit 13 not used
● bit 14 not used
● bit 15 not used
2010 % / 100 Speed reference command
2011 % / 100 Flux reference
2012 % / 100 Power factor (1.0 = 100 %)
2013 KVAR Kvar
2014 Hz / 10 Motor speed, filtered
RPM
% / 10
2015 % / 100 Flux DS, filtered
2016 % / 100 Peak voltage clamp limit, normalized
2017 % / 10 Hot cell temperature (80 % = Trip point)
2020 RPM Speed feedback
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
264 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2022 Bit Field ● bit 0: Reserved
● bit 1: Fixed Under Speed Output
● bit 2: Variable Under Speed Output
● bit 3: Fixed Over Speed Output
● bit 4: Variable Over Speed Output
● bit 5: Reserved
● bit 6: Reserved
● bit 7: Reserved
● bit 8: Fixed Under Current Phase A Output
● bit 9: Fixed Under Current Phase B Output
● bit 10: Fixed Under Current Phase C Output
● bit 11: Reserved
● bit 12: Reserved
● bit 13: Reserved
● bit 14: Variable Under Current Phase A Output
● bit 15: Variable Under Current Phase B Output
2023 Bit Field ● bit 0: Variable Under Current Phase C Output
● bit 1: Fixed Under Power Output
● bit 2: Fixed Torque Pulsation Output
● bit 3: Fixed Negative Sequence Over Current Output
● bit 4: Reserved
● bit 5: Maximum Start Time Output
● bit 6: Maximum Stop Time Output
● bit 7: Fixed Thermal Overload Output 1
● bit 8: Fixed Thermal Overload Output 2
● bit 9: Variable Thermal Overload Output 1
● bit 10: Variable Thermal Overload Output 2
● bit 11: Fixed Instantaneous Over Current Phase A
Output
● bit 12: Fixed Instantaneous Over Current Phase B
Output
● bit 13: Fixed Instantaneous Over Current Phase C
Output
● bit 14: Inverse Time Over Current Phase A Output
● bit 15: Inverse Time Over Current Phase B Output
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 265
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2024 Bit Field ● bit 0: Inverse Time Over Current Phase C Output
● bit 1: Zero Sequence Over Voltage Output
● bit 2: Instantaneous Zero Sequence Over Voltage
Output
● bit 3: Fixed Maximum Power Factor Output
● bit 4: Fixed Minimum Power Factor Output
● bit 5: Reserved
● bit 6: Reserved
● bit 7: Fixed Over Frequency Output
● bit 8: Variable Over Frequency Output
● bit 9: Fixed Under Frequency Output
● bit 10: Variable Under Frequency Output
● bit 11: High Frequency Rate of Change Output
● bit 12: RTD Communications Loss
● bit 13: Maximum Thermal Capacity for Start Exceeded
● bit 14: RTD Block Start Issued
● bit 15: Max Cold Starts Block Issued
2025 Bit Field ● bit 0: Max Hot Starts Block Issued
● bit 1: Fixed Thermal Overload Block Start Issued
● bit 2: Variable Thermal Overload Block Start Issued
● bit 3: Minimum Start Time Interval Block Start Issued
● bit 4: Reserved
● bit 5: Reserved
● bit 6: Reserved
● bit 7: Reserved
● bit 8: Reserved
● bit 9: Reserved
● bit 10: Reserved
● bit 11: Reserved
● bit 12: Reserved
● bit 13: Reserved
● bit 14: Reserved
● bit 15: Reserved
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
266 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2026 Bit Field ● bit 0: RTD 1 Open Circuit
● bit 1: RTD 2 Open Circuit
● bit 2: RTD 3 Open Circuit
● bit 3: RTD 4 Open Circuit
● bit 4: RTD 5 Open Circuit
● bit 5: RTD 6 Open Circuit
● bit 6: RTD 7 Open Circuit
● bit 7: RTD 8 Open Circuit
● bit 8: RTD 9 Open Circuit
● bit 9: RTD 10 Open Circuit
● bit 10: RTD 11 Open Circuit
● bit 11: RTD 12 Open Cirucit
● bit 12: Reserved
● bit 13: Reserved
● bit 14: Reserved
● bit 15: Reserved
2027 Bit Field ● bit 0: RTD 1 Short Circuit
● bit 1: RTD 2 Short Circuit
● bit 2: RTD 3 Short Circuit
● bit 3: RTD 4 Short Circuit
● bit 4: RTD 5 Short Circuit
● bit 5: RTD 6 Short Circuit
● bit 6: RTD 7 Short Circuit
● bit 7: RTD 8 Short Circuit
● bit 8: RTD 9 Short Circuit
● bit 9: RTD 10 Short Circuit
● bit 10: RTD 11 Short Circuit
● bit 11: RTD 12 Short Cirucit
● bit 12: Reserved
● bit 13: Reserved
● bit 14: Reserved
● bit 15: Reserved
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 267
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2028 Bit Field ● bit 0: RTD 1 Over Temperature Output
● bit 1: RTD 2 Over Temperature Output
● bit 2: RTD 3 Over Temperature Output
● bit 3: RTD 4 Over Temperature Output
● bit 4: RTD 5 Over Temperature Output
● bit 5: RTD 6 Over Temperature Output
● bit 6: RTD 7 Over Temperature Output
● bit 7: RTD 8 Over Temperature Output
● bit 8: RTD 9 Over Temperature Output
● bit 9: RTD 10 Over Temperature Output
● bit 10: RTD 11Over Temperature Output
● bit 11: RTD 12 Over Temperature Output
● bit 12: Reserved
● bit 13: Reserved
● bit 14: Reserved
● bit 15: Reserved
2030 % / 100 Speed feedback (Stator frequency)
2040 RPM Speed demand (Requested speed)
2050 % / 100 Speed demand (Requested speed)
2060 % / 100 Raw speed input (Speed input from selected source)
2070 % / 100 Ramp output (From speed ramp)
2080 Amps Torque demand
2090 % / 100 Torque demand
2100 Volts Motor voltage
2110 % / 100 Motor voltage
2120 Volts Line voltage
2130 Amps Input current
2140 Hz / 100 Line frequency
2150 Amps Torque current feedback (Iqs)
2160 % / 100 Torque current feedback (Iqs)
2170 Amps Magnetizing Current Feedback (Ids)
2180 % / 100 Magnetizing Current Feedback (Ids)
2190 Amps Total Current Feedback
2200 % / 100 Total Current Feedback
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
268 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2210 N/A N/A Drive state:
● 0 = Off
● 1 = Magnetizing
● 2 = Spinning Load
● 3 = Autotune
● 4 = Run
● 5 = Stop
● 6 = Coast
● 7 = Up Transfer
● 8 = Down Transfer
2220 N/A N/A Heartbeat (1 ms update)
2230 Kw 1 Output power
2240 % * 100 / 100 Output power
2250 Kw 1 Input power
2260 % * 100 / 100 Input power
2270 % * 100 / 100 EO Avg Output Neutral Voltage
2280 Volts 1 EO Avg Output Neutral Voltage
Table B-2 Serial Flags
Serial Flag Data ID Bit SOP Flag* Value
1 S1_1 2380 0 – 15 Serial Flag 0_O – 15_O ● 0 = False (off)
● 1 = True (on) 2 S1_2 2390 0 – 15 Serial Flag 16_O – 31_O
3 S1_3 2400 0 – 15 Serial Flag 32_O – 47_O
4 S1_4 2410 0 – 15 Serial Flag 48_O – 63_O
* Serial flags are mapped using the SOP
Table B-3 Network Output Flags
Network Data ID Bit SOP Flag* Value
1 2002 0 – 15 Network1Flag0_O – Network1Flag15_O ● 0 = False (off)
● 1 = True (on) 2003 0 – 15 Network1Flag16_O – Network1Flag31_O
2004 0 – 15 Network1Flag32_O – Network1Flag47_O
2005 0 – 15 Network1Flag48_O – Network1Flag63_O
2 2006 0 – 15 Network2Flag0_O – Network2Flag15_O
2007 0 – 15 Network2Flag16_O – Network2Flag31_O
2008 0 – 15 Network2Flag32_O – Network2Flag47_O
2009 0 – 15 Network2Flag48_O – Network2Flag63_O
* Network flags are mapped using the SOP
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 269
Table B-4 WAGO™ Input and Output Flags
Input or Output Data ID Bit SOP Flag Value
Input 2650 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput01a_I – ExternalDigitalInput01h_I ● 0 = False (off)
● 1 = True (on) 8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput02a_I – ExternalDigitalInput02h_I
2651 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput03a_I – ExternalDigitalInput03h_I
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput04a_I – ExternalDigitalInput04h_I
2652 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput05a_I – ExternalDigitalInput05h_I
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput06a_I – ExternalDigitalInput06h_I
2653 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput07a_I – ExternalDigitalInput07h_I
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput08a_I – ExternalDigitalInput08h_I
2654 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput09a_I – ExternalDigitalInput09h_I
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput10a_I – ExternalDigitalInput10h_I
2655 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalInput11a_I – ExternalDigitalInput11h_I
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalInput12a_I – ExternalDigitalInput12h_I
Output 2656 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalOutput01a_O – ExternalDigitalOutput01h_O ● 0 = False (off)
● 1 = True (on) 8 – 15 ExternalDigitalOutput02a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput02h_ O
2657 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalOutput03a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput03h_ O
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalOutput04a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput04h_ O
2658 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalOutput05a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput05h_ O
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalOutput06a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput06h_ O
2659 0 – 7 ExternalDigitalOutput07a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput07h_ O
8 – 15 ExternalDigitalOutput08a_ O – ExternalDigitalOutput08h_ O
* Network flags are mapped using the SOP
Table B-5 Internal Digital Inputs and Outputs
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
5116 N/A 1 Internal Digital Inputs 1 - 16
5117 N/A 1 Internal Digital Inputs 17 - 20
5118 N/A 1 Internal Digital Outputs 1 - 16
Table B-6 Cell Temperature
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
4090 % / 10 CellTemperature+0 (A1)
4100 % / 10 CellTemperature+1 (B1)
4110 % / 10 CellTemperature+2 (C1)
4120 % / 10 CellTemperature+3 (A2)
4130 % / 10 CellTemperature+4 (B2)
4140 % / 10 CellTemperature+5 (C2)
4150 % / 10 CellTemperature+6 (A3)
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
270 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
4160 % / 10 CellTemperature+7 (B3)
4170 % / 10 CellTemperature+8 (C3)
4180 % / 10 CellTemperature+9 (A4)
4190 % / 10 CellTemperature+10 (B4)
4200 % / 10 CellTemperature+11 (C4)
4210 % / 10 CellTemperature+12 (A5)
4220 % / 10 CellTemperature+13 (B5)
4230 % / 10 CellTemperature+14 (C5)
4240 % / 10 CellTemperature+15 (A6)
4250 % / 10 CellTemperature+16 (B6)
4260 % / 10 CellTemperature+17 (C6)
4270 % / 10 CellTemperature+18 (A7)
4280 % / 10 CellTemperature+19 (B7)
4290 % / 10 CellTemperature+20 (C7)
4300 % / 10 CellTemperature+21 (A8)
4310 % / 10 CellTemperature+22 (B8)
4320 % / 10 CellTemperature+23 (C8)
Fault and Alarm Data
● Faults are enabled using one of these options:
– always enabled (when the fault occurs, the fault bit will be set).
– enabled by a bit in the SOP drctry file (the fault bit will only be set if the enable bit is set
on in the SOP drtry file).
Note
System Operating Programs (SOPs) are written and modified by Siemens engineers.
The following data is for information purposes only.
For further information on these parameters, refer to the Operation Chapter of the Operating
Instructions Manual.
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 271
● Description of faults and alarms:
– Faults: Once a fault occurs, the drive is immediately tripped (stopped). It is not possible
to run the drive again until the fault is cleared.
– Alarms: An alarm is an indication of a potential trouble condition. An alarm will not trip or
stop the drive. An alarm cannot be reset by any action. The only way an alarm is reset
is when the condition that caused the alarm ceases to exist. An alarm can be
acknowledged by attempting to reset either by the drive tool (reset button), keypad (reset
key), digital input, SOP flag, menu, auto reset, or through a communication bit. Once an
alarm condition does not exist, and it has not been acknowledged, it is in an
“unacknowledged” state and the unacknowledged bits will remain high until they are
acknowledged.
– Active Faults: This bit is high when the fault is active or in an active state.
Note
Bits not listed in the following tables are undefined.
Table B-7 Number of Faults and Alarms
Data ID Bit Description Value
3000 N/A Number of active faults 0 – 255
3010 N/A Number of unacknowledged alarms 0 – 255
3020 N/A Number of active alarms 0 – 255
* Network flags are mapped using the SOP
The Enable Column within Tables Fault Word 1 to 4 is defined as follows:
● F = fixed (always enabled and not changeable by the user)
● PE = programmable to enable (default state is enabled)
● PD = programmable to disable (default state is disabled)
Table B-8 Fault Word 1
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
FW1_1
3030 Fault Flags1: Fatal
Outputs
1 Over speed fault Fault F 3 Under load fault Fault F 6 Mtr Therm Over Ld Fault Fault F
10 IOC Fault F
12 Cell (any cell fault) Fault F
14 In torq limit Programmable PD
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
272 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
3150 and
3270
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags1
(3150) and
Active Warning
Flags1 (3270)
0 Over speed alarm Alarm PD
2 Under load alarm Alarm PD
4 Mtr Therm Over Load 1 Alarm PD
5 Mtr Therm Over Load 2 Alarm PD
7 Output phase imbal Alarm F 9 Output Ground fault Alarm F
13 In torque limit Alarm PD
14 In torq limit rollback Programmable PD
15 Input phase loss Alarm PE
FW1_2
3040 Fault Flags2 0 Phase sequence Programmable PD
2 CPU Temperature Fault Fault PD
4 Cell over temp fault Fault F 5 Modulator Configuration Fault F 6 Cell count mismatch Fault F 7 Power supply Fault F 8 WAGO™ communication fault Fault PE
9 WAGO™ configuration Fault PE
10 Cell bypass COM fail Fault F
11 Cell bypass acknowledge Fault F
12 Cell bypass link Fault F
14 System program Fault F
3160 and
3280
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags2
(3160) and
Active Warning
Flags2 (3280)
0 Phase sequence Programmable PD
1 CPU Temperature Alarm Alarm F 3 Cell over temp alarm Alarm F
13 Weak battery* Alarm F
15 Medium voltage low 1 Alarm PD
FW1_3
3050 Fault Flags3 1 Medium voltage low flt Fault F 5 Line over voltage fault Programmable F 6 Input phase imbal Programmable F 7 Input one cycle Programmable1 F 9 Encoder loss Programmable PD
10 Keypad communication Programmable PD
11 Network 1 communication Programmable PD
12 Network 2 communication Programmable PD
14 Motor over volt fault Fault F
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 273
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
3170 and
3290
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags3
(3170) and
Active Warning
Flags3 (3290)
0 Medium voltage low 2 Alarm F 2 Cell alarm Alarm F 3 Line over voltage 1 Alarm PD
4 Line over voltage 2 Alarm PD
6 Input phase imbalance Alarm F 7 Input one cycle Programmable F 8 Input ground Alarm F 9 Encoder loss Programmable PD
10 Keypad communication Programmable PD
11 Network 1 communication Programmable PD
12 Network 2 communication Programmable PD
13 Motor over volt alarm Alarm PE
15 Cell bypass comm alarm Alarm F
FW1_4
3060 Fault Flags4 1 Cell bypass fault Fault F 2 Cell config fault Fault F 4 Back EMF timeout Fault F 5 Hall effect pwr supply Fault F 6 Modulator board fault Fault F 8 Modulator watchdog Flt Fault F
10 Tool communication Programmable PD
11 Failed to magnetize Programmable F
12 Loss of field current Programmable F
13 Minimum speed trip Programmable PE
14 Excessive drive losses Programmable1 F
3180 and
3300
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags4
(3180) and
Active Warning
Flags4 (3300)
0 Cell bypass link alarm Alarm F 3 Carrier Frq Set Too Low Alarm F 9 Cell DC bus low Alarm F
10 Tool communication Programmable PD
11 Failed to magnetize Programmable F
12 Loss of field current Programmable F
14 Excessive drive losses alarm Programmable1 F
15 WAGO™ communication
alarm
Alarm PD
* Only for modulator board equipped with battery
1 Fault if air-cooled 6SR4[ ]02 drive or water-cooled 6SR3[ ]52 drive
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
274 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table B-9 Fault Word 2
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
FW2_1
3070 Fault Flags5 1 All blowers not avail Programmable PD
2 Clogged filters Alarm PD
5 Reactor OT Fault Programmable PD
8 Xformer OT Fault Programmable PD
10 Both pumps not available Programmable PD
12 Coolant Conductivity Programmable PD
13 Inlet water temperature high
Coolant Inlet Temp
Programmable PD
14 Coolant Inlet Temp Inlet water
temperature low
Programmable PD
15 Cell water temperature high Programmable PD
3190 and
3310
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags5
(3190) and
Active Warning
Flags5 (3310)
0 One blower not avail Programmable PD
1 All blowers not avail Programmable PD
2 Clogged filters Programmable PD
3 Reactor temperature 1OT
Alarm alarm
Alarm PD
4 Reactor temperature 2OT Trip
Alarm alarm
Alarm PD
5 Reactor OT Fault Programmable PD
6 Transformer Xformer OT Tem‐
perature 1 alarm
Alarm PD
7 Xformer OT Trip Transformer
temperature 2 alarm
Alarm PD
9 One pump not AvailableFailed Alarm PD
10 Both pumps not available Programmable PD
11 Coolant conductivity high
AlarmCoolant Conductivity
Alarm PD
12 Coolant Conductivity Programmable PD
13 Inlet water temperature High‐
Coolant Inlet Temp
Programmable PD
14 Coolant Inlet Temp Inlet water
temperature low
Programmable PD
15 Cell water temperature high Programmable PD
FW2_2
3080 Fault Flags6 0 Xfrm Cool OT Trip Alarm Programmable PD
2 Coolant Tank Level Programmable PD
4 Low Coolant Flow Programmable PD
6 Loss all HEX fans Programmable PD
8 Loss of drive enable Fault PD
12 A/D Hardware fault Fault F
14 Config File Read Error Fault F
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 275
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
3200 and
3320
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags6
(3200) and
Active Warning
Flags6 (3320)
0 Xfrm Cool OT Trip Alarm Programmable PD
1 Coolant Tank Level Alarm PD
3 Low Coolant Flow Alarm PD
4 Low Coolant Flow Programmable PD
5 Loss one HEX fan Alarm PD
6 Loss all HEX fans Programmable PD
7 All HEX fans on Alarm PD
9 Up transfer failed Alarm PD
10 Down transfer failed Alarm PD
11 A/D Hardware alarm Alarm F
13 Config File Write Alarm Alarm F
FW2_3
3090 Fault Flags7 7 Loss of signal intern Programmable PD
8 to 15 Loss of signal 1 to 8 Programmable PD
3210 and
3330
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags7
(3210) and
Active Warning
Flags7 (3330)
7 Loss of signal intern Programmable PD
8 to 15 Loss of signal 1 to 8 Programmable PD
FW2_4
3100 Fault Flags8 0 to 15 Loss of signal 9 to 24 Programmable PD
3220 and
3340
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags8
(3220) and
Active Warning
Flags8 (3340)
0 to 15 Loss of signal 9 to 24 Programmable PD
Table B-10 Fault Word 3
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
FW3_1
3110 Fault Flags9 0 to 15 User fault 1 to 16 (bit number +
1)
Programmable PD
3230 and
3350
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags9
(3230) and
Active Warning
Flags9 (3350)
0 to 15 User fault 1 to 16 (bit number +
1)
Programmable PD
FW3_2
3120 Fault Flags10 0 to 15 User fault 17 to 32 (bit number
+ 17)
Programmable PD
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
276 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
3240 and
3360
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags10
(3240) and
Active Warning
Flags10 (3360)
0 to 15 User fault 17 to 32 (bit number
+ 17)
Programmable PD
FW3_3
3130 Fault Flags11 0 to 15 User fault 33 to 48 (bit number
+ 33)
Programmable PD
3250 and
3370
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags11
(3250) and
Active Warning
Flags11 (3370)
0 to 15 User fault 33 to 48 (bit number
+ 33)
Programmable PD
FW3_4
3140 Fault Flags12 0 to 15 User fault 49 to 64
(bit number + 49)
Programmable PD
3260 and
3380
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags12
(3260) and
Active Warning
Flags12 (3380)
0 to 15 User fault 49 to 64
(bit number + 49)
Programmable PD
Table B-11 Fault Word 4
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
FW4_1
3141 Fault Flags13 0 Loss of internal analog input #1 Programmable PD
1 Loss of internal analog input #2 Programmable PD
2 Loss of internal analog input #3 Programmable PD
3 to 15 Reserved for future use
3261 and
3381
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags13
(3261) and
Active Warning
Flags13 (3381)
0 Loss of internal analog input #1 Programmable PD
1 Loss of internal analog input #2 Programmable PD
2 Loss of internal analog input #3 Programmable PD
3 to 15 Reserved for future use
FW4_2
3142 Fault Flags14 0 to 15 Reserved for future use
3262 and
3382
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags14
(3262) and
Active Warning
Flags14 (3382)
0 to 15 Reserved for future use
FW4_3
3143 Fault Flags15 0 to 15 Reserved for future use
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 277
Data ID Fault Description Bit Bit Description Alarm / Fault / Pro‐
grammable
Enable
3263 and
3383
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags15
(3263) and
Active Warning
Flags15 (3383)
0 to 15 Reserved for future use
FW4_4
3144 Fault Flags16 0 to 15 Reserved for future use
3264 and
3384
Unacknowledged
Warning Flags16
(3264) and
Active Warning
Flags16 (3384)
0 to 15 Reserved for future use
Table B-12 Fault/Alarm Flags 1
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags 1-1
3400 0 Over speed alarm
1 Over speed fault
2 Under load alarm
3 Under load fault
4 Mtr Therm Over Load 1
5 Mtr Therm Over Load 2
6 Mtr Therm Over Ld Fault
7 Output phase imbal
8 Output phase open
9 Output Ground fault
10 IOC
11 MenuInit
12 Cell (Any cell)
13 In torque limit
14 In torq limit rollback
15 Input phase loss
Flags 1-2
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
278 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Bit Bit Description
3401 0 Phase sequence
1 CPU Temperature Alarm
2 CPU Temperature Fault
3 Cell over temp alarm
4 Cell over temp fault
5 Modulator Configuration
6 Cell count mismatch
7 Power supply
8 WAGO™ communication fault
9 WAGO™ configuration
10 Cell bypass COM fail
11 Cell bypass acknowledge
12 Cell bypass link
13 System program
14 Weak battery
15 Medium voltage low 1
Flags 1-3
3402 0 Medium voltage low 2
1 Medium voltage low flt
2 Cell alarm
3 Line over voltage 1
4 Line over voltage 2
5 Line over voltage fault
6 Input phase imbal
7 Input one cycle
8 Input ground
9 Encoder loss
10 Keypad communication
11 Network 1 communication
12 Network 2 communication
13 Motor over volt alarm
14 Motor over volt fault
15 Cell bypass comm alarm
Flags 1-4
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 279
Data ID Bit Bit Description
3403 0 Cell bypass link alarm
1 Cell bypass fault
2 Cell config fault
3 Carrier Frq Set Too Low
4 Back EMF timeout
5 Hall effect pwr supply
6 Modulator board fault
7 Not used
8 Modulator watchdog Flt
9 Cell DC bus low
10 Tool communication
11 Failed to magnetize
12 Loss of field current
13 Minimum speed trip
14 Excessive drive losses
15 WAGO™ communication alarm
Table B-13 Fault/Alarm Flags 2
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags 2-1
3404 0 One blower not avail
1 All blowers not avail
2 Clogged filters
3 Reactor temperature 1OT Alarm
4 Reactor temperature 2OT Trip Alarm
5 Reactor OT Fault
6 Transformer Xformer OT Temperature 1 alarm
7 Xformer OT Trip Transformer temperature 2 alarm
8 Xformer OT Fault
9 One pump not availablefailed
10 Both pumps not available
11 Coolant conductivity high AlarmCoolant Conductivity
12 Coolant Conductivity
13 Inlet water temperature HighCoolant Inlet Temp
14 Coolant Inlet Temp Inlet water temperature low
15 Cell water temperature high
Flags 2-2
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
280 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Bit Bit Description
3405 0 Xfrm Cool OT Trip Alarm
1 Coolant Tank Level
2 Coolant Tank Level
3 Low Coolant Flow
4 Low Coolant Flow
5 Loss one HEX fan
6 Loss all HEX fans
7 All HEX fans on
8 Loss of drive enable
9 Up transfer failed
10 Down transfer failed
11 A/D Hardware alarm
12 A/D Hardware fault
13 Config File Write Alarm
14 Config File Read Error
15 Not used
Flags 2-3
3406 0 to 6 Not used
7 Loss of signal intern
8 to 15 Loss of signal 1 to 8
Flags 2-4
3407 0 to 15 Loss of signal 9 to 24
Table B-14 Fault/Alarm Flags 3
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags 3-1
3408 0 to 15 User Fault 1 to 16
Flags 3-2
3409 0 to 15 User Fault 17 to 32
Flags 3-3
3410 0 to 15 User Fault 33 to 48
Flags 3-4
3411 0 to 15 User Fault 49 to 64
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 281
Table B-15 Fault/Alarm Flags 4
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags 4-1
3436 0 Loss of internal signal #1
1 Loss of internal signal #2
2 Loss of internal signal #3
3 Pre-charge fault
4 AFE Cell Diff temperature alarm
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 AP Cell Air temperature alarm
8 Input frequency alarm
9 AFE Cell Diff temperature fault
10 Field exciter fault
11 SMDC startup fault
12 Pre-charge breaker opened
13 Input protection
14 Pole slip
15 Reserved
Flags 4-2
3437 0 Reserved
1 Pre-charge contactor alarm
2 Main contactor fault
3 Bypass hardware alarm
4 Reserved
5 Motor pull out
6 HV AP mismatch
7 Network customer error 1
8 Network customer error 2
9 Network customer warning 1
10 Network customer warning 2
11 Thermal over temperature rollback active
12 to 15 Not used
Flags 4-3
3438 0 to 15 Reserved for future use
Flags 4-4
3439 0 to 15 Reserved for future use
Table B-16 Fault/Alarm Enable Flags
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags1 1 to 4
3412 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-1
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
282 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID Bit Bit Description
3413 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-2
3414 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-3
3415 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-4
Flags2 1 to 4
3416 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-1
3417 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-2
3418 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-3
3419 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-4
Flags3 1 to 4
0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-1
3421 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-2
3422 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-3
3423 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-4
Flags4 1 to 4
3440 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-1
3441 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-2
3442 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-3
3443 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-4
Table B-17 Fatal Fault Flags
Data ID Bit Bit Description
Flags1 1 to 4
3424 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-1
3425 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-2
3426 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-3
3427 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 1, Flags 1-4
Flags2 1 to 4
3428 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-1
3429 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-2
3430 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-3
3431 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 2, Flags 2-4
Flags3 1 to 4
3432 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-1
3433 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-2
3434 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-3
3435 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 3, Flags 3-4
Flags4 1 to 4
3444 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-1
3445 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-2
3446 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-3
3447 0 to 15 Refer to Table Fault/Alarm Flags 4, Flags 4-4
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 283
Read Register Data
Table B-18 Analog Input Read Registers
Data ID Unit Point description Range
3502 to 3525 N/A Analog input #1 to Analog input #24 ● 0mA = 0 to 20mA = 32767
● 0V = 0 to 10V = 32767
Table B-19 Active Cells Read Registers
Data ID Unit Point description Range
4000 Cells Active cells phase A 0 to 8
4010 Cells Active cells phase B 0 to 8
4020 Cells Active cells phase C 0 to 8
Note: When Medium Voltage is low, status of these registers is invalid.
Cell Status Data
Table B-20 Cell Status
Data ID Bit Description Value
● 4030 (Phase A)
● 4040 (Phase B)
● 4050 (Phase C)
0 Cell 1 status ● 0 = Not installed
● 1 = Active
● 2 = Bypassed
● 3 = Faulted
12 Cell 2 status
34 Cell 3 status
56 Cell 4 status
78 Cell 5 status
9
10 Cell 6 status
11
12 Cell 7 status
13
14 Cell 8 status
15
Note: When Medium Voltage is low, status of these registers is invalid.
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
284 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Table B-21 Cell Bypass Status
Data ID Bit Description Value
● 4060 (Phase A)
● 4070 (Phase B)
● 4080 (Phase C)
0 Cell 1 bypass status ● 0 = Unavailable
● 1 = Bypassed
● 2 = Available
12 Cell 2 bypass status
34 Cell 3 bypass status
56 Cell 4 bypass status
78 Cell 5 bypass status
9
10 Cell 6 bypass status
11
12 Cell 7 bypass status
13
14 Cell 8 bypass status
15
Miscellaneous Data
Table B-22 Performance Data
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2161 % / 100 Drive Losses
2162 % / 100 Excessive Reactive Current
2163 % / 100 Speed Droop
2164 % / 100 Sync Motor Field Current
2168 % / 100 Efficiency
Table B-23 Parameter Read/Write Data
Data ID Name Value
2660 Network 1 PFD1 Refer to Appendix Parameter Read / Write.
2661 Network 1 PFD2
2662 Network 1 PFD3
2663 Network 1 PFD4
2664 Network 2 PFD1
2665 Network 2 PFD2
2666 Network 2 PFD3
2667 Network 2 PFD4
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 285
Table B-24 Parallel Drive Data
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
2268 N/A / 100 Peak Voltage clamp Limit
2269 N/A Parallel Drive Status:
● bit 0: Slave
● bit 1: In Network
● bit 2: Spinning Load Enabled
● bit 3: Energy Saver Enabled
● bit 4: Speed Loop Test Mode Enabled
● bit 5: Auto Tune Enabled
● bit 6: Reset Timeout
2271 N/A N/A Handshake
2272 N/A / 100 Available PVCL
2273 / 100 Available Torque
2274 1 Number of Nodes
2275 Amps Mag Current Command Amps
2276 % / 100 Mag Current Command %
2277 / 100 Field Weakening Output
Table B-25 Voltage/Current Data
Data ID
(min / max / average)
Unit Scalar Point description
3600 / 3601 / 3602 % / 100 Real Current Feedback Filtered
3603 / 3604 / 3605 % / 100 Real Current Feedback Filtered
3606 / 3607 / 3608 % / 100 DC Link Voltage
3609 / 3610 / 3611 % / 100 Real Voltage Feed Forward
3612 / 3613 / 3614 Hz / 10 Input Frequency
3615 / 3616 / 3617 % / 100 Real Voltage Command
3618 / 3619 / 3620 % / 100 Reactive Voltage Command
3621 / 3622 / 3623 % / 100 Highest Cell Temperature
3624 / 3625 / 3626 % / 100 Differential Cell Temperature
3627 / 3628 / 3629 % * 100 Input Current
3630 / 3631 / 3632 % * 100 Multiplexer Data
3633 State
3634 Status
3635 EPLD Status 1
3636 EPLD Status 2
3637 / 3638 / 3639 / 100 Water Flow
3640 / 3641 / 3642 / 100 Water Glycol Flow
3643 Number of AFE Cells
3644 Number of AFE Cells With Open Sensors
3653 % / 100 Available Reactive Current
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
286 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Data ID
(min / max / average)
Unit Scalar Point description
3660 A / 1000 Drive Torque Capability
3661 V 1 V_a RMS Output Phase Voltage
3662 V 1 V_b RMS Output Phase Voltage
3663 V 1 V_c RMS Output Phase Voltage
3664 A 1 I_a RMS Output Phase Current
3665 A 1 I_b RMS Output Phase Current
3666 A 1 I_c RMS Output Phase Current
3668 MWHr 1 Input MWHr
3669 A 1 Input Ia Phase Current
3670 A 1 Input Ib Phase Current
3671 A 1 Input Ic Phase Current
3672 V 1 Input Va (line to neutral)
3673 V 1 Input Vb (line to neutral)
3674 V 1 Input Vc (line to neutral)
3675 % / 100 Input Reactive Power
3676 % / 100 Input Reactive Current
Table B-26 SilcoGraph Data
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
3645 to 3652 % / 100 Float outputs 0 to 7
Table B-27 Shared Memory Data
Data ID Unit Scalar Point description
3654 to 3659 Shared memory handshake 0 to 5
Table B-28 Internal Network Data
Data ID Description Value
5000 Handshake Refer to Appendix Network Implementation.
5001 to 5009 Discrete Outputs
5100 Net Input Pulse
5101 to 5109 Discrete Inputs
5110 to 5115 Analog Inputs
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 287
Table B-29 Register to Drive Manual IDs
Data ID Unit Description
9601 to 9664 not applicable Network1 Data to Drive Register n (n = 1 to 64)
9701 to 9764 not applicable Network1 Data to Drive Register n (n = 1 to 64)
Note: Manual IDs are used to map data between networks. As an example, use ToolSuite or the drive keypad to set Network2
"Data from Drive 06" (9506) to "Manual ID" and Enter "9603" to map this manual ID value.
Output Data IDs
B.1 Output data IDs
NXGpro Communication
288 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
'+
1(7
1(7
7[
5[
15HJ
15HJ
)%
Display Network Monitor C
Description
Use parameter 'Display Network Monitor' (9950) to view the values of network registers. This
is useful for troubleshooting. As data is transmitted, and the values of the registers change, the
display automatically updates to reflect the changes.
Note
The direction of data transmission shown on the screen is displayed as seen by the drive,
meaning that:
● Rx refers to data received into the drive
● Tx refers to data transmitted from the drive.
Figure C-1 Display Network Monitor Function
1 Format of the register value dis‐
play
D = decimal format
H = hexadecimal format
2 Network for this register The drive may be connected to 2 separate networks:
● NET 1
● NET 2
3 Data direction Rx = Data to Drive register
Tx = Data from Drive register
4 Global or non-global register G = global register
N = non-global register
5 Register number 2-digit numeric field that indicates the number of the
register being shown.
● Tx 01-64 = Data from Drive 01 (ID 9401) to Data
from Drive 64 (ID 9464)
● Rx 01-64 = Data to Drive 01 (ID 9601) to Data to
Drive 64 (ID 9664)
6 Register value The value of the register. Since the registers all con‐
tain 16-bit digital words, they range in value from
0-65535 (decimal), or 0-FFFF (hexadecimal).
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 289
7 Line 1 data Line 1 in the example diagram provides the following
information:
● register value in decimal format
● register is in network 1
● data is going to the drive
● register is non-global
● register is number 1
● register value is 257
8 Line 2 data Line 2 in the example diagram provides the following
information:
● register value in hexadecimal format
● register is in network 2
● data is coming from the drive
● register is non-global
● register is number 2
● register value is 0xF1B
Note
The only network that supports global data is Modbus™ Plus.
All other networks do not support global data for the global or non-global register.
Editing Values in the Display
Underscores on the display (as shown in the previous figure) indicate that values can be edited
in these areas.
To edit values in the display:
● Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor horizontally.
● Use the up and down arrow keys to edit alphabetical fields.
● Use the up and down arrow keys or the numeric keys to edit numerical fields.
● To move the cursor to the second line, continue pressing the right arrow key after reaching
the end of the first line.
● To move the cursor back to the first line, continue pressing the right arrow key after reaching
the end of the second line.
● Use the left arrow key in the same manner to move the cursor in the opposite direction.
Display Network Monitor
NXGpro Communication
290 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
External Modem D
Overview
The NXGpro control contains a dedicated isolated RS232 port to support the use of an external
modem. The external modem allows for remote monitoring of the NXGpro drive.
Operation
The control software initializes the modem. If no call is in progress, the modem initialization
string will be sent every 30 seconds. This allows the modem to be initialized should it lose
power.
When the external modem receives a phone call it will auto negotiate the baud rate with the
calling modem and send a "RING" command to the NXGpro control. The NXGpro commands
the modem to answer the call. The calling user is then prompted to enter a user ID and
password. The password is verified against the modem password, parameter (9025). If the
password is correct, a menu based text screen is sent to the user for monitoring the drive.
The calling user can monitor drive functions from the built-in text screens. The text screens are
built into the NXGpro software so that only a terminal emulator program is required to monitor
the drive via a modem.
The modem password, parameter (9025), is located in the Serial Port Setup Menu (9010) which
is under the Communications Menu. The modem password is four characters. Each character
can be set from 0 to 9 or A to Z by scrolling through each character.
Table D-1 Serial Port Setup Menu (9010)
Parameter ID Units Default Min Max Description
Modem pass‐
word
9025 NXG1 Set the modem password for serial port use. Enter the four
character password that can consist of 0 to 9, A to Z, by
scrolling through each character.
The following figure shows the external modem function diagram.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 291
1;*SUR&RQWURO 8VHU3&
([WHUQDO0RGHP ([WHUQDO0RGHP
7HOHSKRQHOLQH
56 56
Figure D-1 NXGpro External Modem Function Diagram
External Modem
NXGpro Communication
292 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter Read/Write E
The 'parameter read/write' function allows you to use a PLC to read and write parameter values
in the drive. The following registers are available:
● Parameters To Drive (PTD)
Use these registers to read and write parameter commands, read and write pick list items,
and execute certain functions.
● Parameters From Drive (PFD)
Use these registers to echo the PTD command, hold the PTD read command results, and
produce an error code if the PTD command cannot be performed.
E.1 Setting up the PTD and PFD registers
The following menus and submenus provide access for setting up the PFD and PTD registers:
● Communications Menu (9)
● Submenu Network 1 Configure (9900)
● Submenu Network 2 Configure (9914)
Select PFD and PTD registers using the pick lists listed in the Planning/Configuring Chapter.
The pick lists include the available registers as follows:
● Data from Drive registers for use in IDs 9403 to 9464:
– PFD1
– PFD2
– PFD3
– PFD4
● Data to Drive registers for use in IDs 9603 to 9664:
– PTD1
– PTD2
– PTD3
– PTD4
Note
Place each set of 4 registers in sequential IDs.
Each register performs a specific function.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 293
E.2 Defining the PFD Registers
The PFD registers are defined in the following table, which provides all possible contents of the
PFD registers. The PFD1 register consists of 16 bits as described in the table.
Table E-1 Contents of PFD Registers 1 to 4
PFD Register Register Function Bit Description
PFD1 Status 0 to 6 Echo of Command from PTD
7 Error Flag:
● If Bit 7 is not set (0), Bits 8 to 15 represent the exponent, i.e.
number of decimal digits.
● If Bit 7 is set (1), Bits 8 to 15 contain the error codes listed
below.
8 to 15 Error code and description:
● 0 Not used
● 1 Invalid ID
● 2 Limit Error
● 3 Drive is running. Cannot change value.
● 4 Parameter/pick list write Lockout (drive does allow
parameter changes).
● 5 ID is parameter type. Use parameter commands.
● 6 ID is a pick list type. Use pick list commands.
● 7 Command Error: Use write pick list Manual ID Command
● 8 Command Error: Use write pick list command
● 9 Invalid Manual ID
● 10 Fixed Pick List (item is read only)
● 11 Pick List Item Already Selected
● 12 Invalid Function ID
● 13 to 255 Reserved for Future Use
PFD2 Menu ID Echo N/a Menu ID echo for the required command
PFD3 Read Value N/a Value returned from read parameter value command for Least
Significant 16-Bits.
If the value is numeric, this register contains the least significant
16 bits.
If the value is a Read String, this register contains the first 2 bytes.
PFD4 Read Exponent N/a Value returned from read parameter value command for Most
Significant 16-Bits.
If the value is numeric, this register contains the most significant
16 bits.
If the value is a Read String, this register contains the second 2
bytes.
Parameter Read/Write
E.2 Defining the PFD Registers
NXGpro Communication
294 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
E.3 Defining the PTD Registers
The PTD registers are defined in the following table, which provides all possible contents of the
PTD registers. The PTD1 register can have a value of 0 to 127 for various commands as
described in the table.
Table E-2 Contents of PTD Registers 1 to 4
PTD Register Register Function Value Description
PTD1: Bits 0 to 7 ID Command 0 No Operation
1 Read ID Type:
● 0 = Parameter
● 1 = Pick List Item
● 2 = Pick List with Manual ID (Manual ID Not Selected)
● 3 = Pick List with Manual ID (Manual ID Currently Selected)
● 4 = Function
2 Read Next ID
3 Read ID Minimum Value
4 Read ID Maximum Value
5 Read ID String Length
6 to 11 Read ID String (4 bytes per command)
12 Read ID Security Level (0, 5, 7)
13 Write ID Security Level (0, 5, 7)
14 Read ID Default Value
15 Read ID Default Used (0 = No, 1 = Yes)
16 to 20 Reserved for Future Use
Parameter Command 21 Read Parameter Value
22 Write Parameter Value
23 Read Units Text Length
24 Read Units String (Bytes 1-40)
25 Read IP Address
26 Write IP Address
27 to 30 Reserved for Future Use
Pick List Command 31 Read Pick List Item
32 Write Pick List Item (Not Using Drive ID)
33 Write Pick List Item (Using Drive ID)
34 Read Pick List Text Length
35 to 40 Read Pick List String (4 Bytes per Command)
Function Command
(refer to table below for
supported IDs)
41 Perform Function
42 to 47 Read Function String (4 Bytes per Command)
Reserved 48 to 127 Reserved for Future Use
PTD1: Bits 8 to
11
Exponent N/a Exponent to be used for Write Parameter Value command
PTD2 Menu ID N/a Menu ID for the required command
Parameter Read/Write
E.3 Defining the PTD Registers
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 295
PTD Register Register Function Value Description
PTD3 Write Value N/a Value to be used for write parameter value command for Least
Significant 16-Bits
PTD4 Write Value N/a Value to be used for write parameter value command for Most
Significant 16-Bits
The following table lists the available ID Function commands for use when PTD1 is set to a
"Function command" (value 41).
The table also lists the PTD and PFD usage for each parameter function.
Table E-3 Available ID Function Commands
Parameter ID Function PTD Use PFD Use
1260 Autotune Stage1 Not used Not used
1270 Autotune Stage2 Not used Not used
2640 Reset Bypassed Cells Not used Not used
3510 Start Control Loop Test Not used Not used
3520 Stop Control Loop Test Not used Not used
5045 Set Current As Default Not used ● PFD3: 1 = Error
● PFD4: Not used
5050 Reset to Defaults Not used Not used
6200 Clear Event Log Not used Not used
6240 Alarm/Fault Log Clear Not used ● PFD3: 1 = Error
● PFD4: Not used
8030 Preset Hour Meter ● PTD3 = Value
● PTD4 = Exponent
Not used
8040 Reset Hour Meter Not used Not used
8060 Alarm/Fault Log Clear ● PTD3 = Value
● PTD4 = Exponent
Not used
8070 Reset Output KWH Meter Not used Not used
8074 Preset Input KWH Meter ● PTD3 = Value
● PTD4 = Exponent
Not used
8076 Reset Input KWH Meter Not used Not used
Parameter Read/Write
E.3 Defining the PTD Registers
NXGpro Communication
296 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Parameter ID Function PTD Use PFD Use
8080 Set the Clock Time ● PTD3:
– Seconds (0-59)
– Minutes (0-59)
– Hours (0-23)
– Days
– Month (1-12)
– Year (1999-2099)
● PTD4:
– 0
– 1
– 2
– 3
– 4
– 5
Not used. Invalid combinations of
PTD3/PTD4 return a "Limit Error" in
PFD1.
8090 Display Version Number (Soft‐
ware Release Version)
Not used ● PFD3:
– Bits 0-3: Incremental release
number (if >0)
– Bits 4-7: Minor Revision
– Bits 8-11: Major Revision
– Bits 12-15: Not used
● PFD4: Not used in released
versions
9140* Display Sys Prog Name Not used PFD3: String Length
9147* Display Drctry Version Not used PFD3: String Length
9195* Show Active Config File Not used PFD3: String Length
9946 Net 1 to 2 Reg. Copy Not used Not used
* IDs that support the use of the function string commands (PTD1 values 42-47).
E.4 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write
Register Setup
Use the following procedure to enter and change parameter data in PTD and PFD registers:
1. Write the register data into PTD3 and PTD4 for commands that require PLC data.
2. Write the parameter ID into the PTD2 register.
3. Poll until PFD2 register value equals PTD2 register value (menu ID echo).
4. Write the command type into the PTD1 register.
5. Perform handshake: Poll until the lower 7 bits (0-6) in the PFD1 register are equal to the
value in the PTD1 register (command echo).
Parameter Read/Write
E.4 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 297
6. Error testing:
– Test bit 7 of PFD1 (command echo flag).
– If bit 7 is set, the upper byte of PFD1 is the error code.
– If bit 7 is clear, the upper byte of PFD1 contains the 4-bit exponent for the data if the
command was "Read Parameter Value." For all other commands, the upper byte is zero.
7. Read data: Read register data in PFD3 and PFD4 (commands that return PCD data).
8. End the command: Write zero into the PTD1 register (reset the command).
Example: Changing Parameter 'Rated input voltage' (2010)
To change parameter 'Rated input voltage' (2010) to 3000, proceed as follows:
1. Write 3000 to PTD3. This is the new voltage.
PTD4 is not needed.
2. Write 2010 to PTD2. This is the parameter ID for rated input voltage.
3. Poll PFD2 until its value equals 2010 (the value of PTD2).
4. Write 22 to PTD1. This is the Write Parameter Value command.
5. Poll bits 0 to 6 of PTD1 until the value equals 22 (the value of PTD1).
6. When PFD2 equals PTD2 and the lower 6 bits of PFD1 equal PTD1, test bit 7 of PFD1.
– If bit 7 of PFD1 is not set, read bits 8 to 11 for the exponent.
– If bit 7 of PFD1 is set, read bits 8 to 15 for the error code.
7. Read PFD3 and PFD4 for the new value.
8. Write 0 to PTD1.
Parameter Read/Write
E.4 PLC handshaking procedure for parameter read/write
NXGpro Communication
298 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers F
Description
Multiplexer (MUX) data registers are used when a PLC needs to read more registers than the
number of built in 'Data from Drive' registers, which is 64.
The drive has 8 MUX registers. Each MUX register uses:
● 1 'Data to Drive' register
● 2 'Data from Drive' registers.
The MUX data can access any manual ID register from the drive. Using MUX data registers
requires "handshaking" to take place between the PLC and the drive. MUX data allows the PLC
to access more than 64 registers worth of data but at a slower rate.
Setup Procedure
1. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data from Drive' registers to "Mux1 Data".
2. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data from Drive' registers to "Mux1 Echo".
3. Set one of the 62 programmable 'Data to Drive' registers to "Mux1 Id".
4. Repeat the steps above to use additional MUX registers (Mux2 to Mux8).
Operation
The handshaking operates in the following way:
● The PLC writes a manual ID number into the "Mux1 Id" register.
● The PLC polls the "Mux1 Echo" register until the manual ID set in the "Mux1 Id" register is
present in the "Mux1 Echo" register.
● The PLC reads the data from the "Mux1 Data" register. The data is the value for the manual
ID.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 299
Multiplexer (MUX) Data Registers
NXGpro Communication
300 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Internal Drive Network G
Overview
The internal drive network feature supports communication between a coolant system cabinet
and the drive control cabinet via an internal network.
This appendix provides information relating to this network, but this feature is not intended for
direct customer use; however, the data can be supplied to Network 1 or 2.
Description
The internal drive network is implemented as an Modbus™ Ethernet (Modbus/TCP) socket in
the NXGpro Control and is described in the pages that follow.
Network Parameters
The following parameters are used by the internal drive network and are fixed in the drive
control software:
Network Parameters Value
Network Modbus™ Ethernet
Connector NXGpro CPU Ethernet Port
IP Address Same as the NXG TCP/IP Address
Ethernet Port 5002
Network Timeout 3 seconds
Network Registers
The network comprises of 10 16-bit output registers (from NXGpro) and 16 16-bit input registers
(to NXGpro). The first register in each direction is a handshake register to validate network
communication for network timeout. The next 9 registers in each direction are each mapped as
16 discrete bit values. There are also 6 16-bit analog input values in the to-drive direction. Refer
to the following table.
Register Type Register Number Description
Output Registers (from Drive) 40001 Handshake
40002 to 40010 Discrete Outputs
Input Registers (to Drive) 40101 Net Input Pulse
40102 to 40110 Discrete Inputs
40111 to 40116 Analog Inputs
Note
The values of the input and output register data are dependent on the external device. Refer to
the appropriate documentation for register data definitions.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 301
Manual IDs
The values from the Internal Network are available to customer Networks 1 and 2 through
network output Manual IDs as listed below. The Manual IDs directly reflect the data on the
Internal Network with no scaling.
Manual ID Description
5000 Handshake
5001 to 5009 Discrete Outputs
5100 Net Input Pulse
5101 to 5109 Discrete Inputs
5110 to 5115 Analog Inputs
SOP Flags
All of the discrete input and output bits are mapped to flags available in the SOP as listed in the
following tables. These provide 144 input flags and 144 output flags. Flags are numbered from
low to high as LSB to MSB.
Table G-1 SOP Output Flags
Register Number SOP Output Flags
40002 InternalNetOutFlag0_O - InternalNetOutFlag15_O
40003 InternalNetOutFlag16_O - InternalNetOutFlag31_O
40004 InternalNetOutFlag32_O - InternalNetOutFlag47_O
40005 InternalNetOutFlag48_O - InternalNetOutFlag63_O
40006 InternalNetOutFlag64_O - InternalNetOutFlag79_O
40007 InternalNetOutFlag80_O - InternalNetOutFlag95_O
40008 InternalNetOutFlag96_O - InternalNetOutFlag111_O
40009 InternalNetOutFlag112_O - InternalNetOutFlag127_O
40010 InternalNetOutFlag128_O - InternalNetOutFlag143_O
Table G-2 SOP Input Flags
Register Number SOP Input Flags
40102 InternalNetInFlag0_I - InternalNetInFlag15_I
40103 InternalNetInFlag16_I - InternalNetInFlag31_I
40104 InternalNetInFlag32_I - InternalNetInFlag47_I
40105 InternalNetInFlag48_I - InternalNetInFlag63_I
40106 InternalNetInFlag64_I - InternalNetInFlag79_I
40107 InternalNetInFlag80_I - InternalNetInFlag95_I
40108 InternalNetInFlag96_I - InternalNetInFlag111_I
40109 InternalNetInFlag112_I - InternalNetInFlag127_I
40110 InternalNetInFlag128_I - InternalNetInFlag143_I
Internal Drive Network
NXGpro Communication
302 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Handshaking
An additional SOP input flag, InternalNetCommOk_I, indicates the health of the Internal
Network communications. This flag is set if the Net Input Pulse (40101) is unchanged for 3
seconds.
Internal Drive Network
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 303
Internal Drive Network
NXGpro Communication
304 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
List of abbreviations H
This appendix contains a list of symbols and abbreviations commonly used throughout this
manual group.
Table H-1 Commonly Used Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
• Boolean AND function
+ Addition or Boolean OR function
∑ Summation
µ Microsecond
A Amp, Ampere
AC Alternating Current
accel Acceleration
A/D Analog-to-digital (converter)
AI Analog Input
Alg Analog
AP Advanced protocol for cell communication
avail Available
BTU British thermal units
C Centigrade or Capacitor
cap Capacitor
CCB Cell Control Board
ccw Counter clockwise
CE Formerly European Conformity, now true definition
CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
CLVC Closed Loop Vector Control
cmd Command
com Common
conn Connector
CPS Control Power Supply
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSMC Closed Loop Synchronous Motor Control
CT Current Transformer
cu Cubic
curr, I Current
cw Clockwise
D Derivative (PID), depth
D/A Digital-to-analog (converter)
db Decibel
DC Direct Current
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 305
Abbreviation Meaning
DCR Digital Control Rack
DCS Distributed Control System
decel Deceleration
deg, ° Degrees
Div Division
dmd Demand
e Error
ELV Extra Low Voltage
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMF Electromotive Force
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EPS Encoder Power Supply
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ESP Electrical Submersible Pump
ESTOP, e-stop Emergency Stop
fb, fdbk Feedback
ffwd Feed Forward
FLC Full Load Current
freq Frequency
ft, ' Feet
fwd Forward
gnd Ground
GUI Graphical User Interface
H Height
hex Hexadecimal
hist Historic
Hp Horsepower
hr Hour
HVAC Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
HVF Harmonic Voltage Factor
Hz Hertz
I Integral (PID)
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
In Input
In, " Inches
INH Inhibit
I/O Input(s)/Output(s)
IOB I/O Breakout Board
IOC Instantaneous Overcurrent
IP Input Protection
List of abbreviations
NXGpro Communication
306 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Abbreviation Meaning
k 1,000 (e.g., Kohm)
kHz KiloHertz
kV Kilo Volts
kVA One Thousand Volt Amps
kW Kilowatt
L Inductor
LAN Local Area Network
Lbs Pounds (weight)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
ld Load
LED Light-emitting Diode
LFR Latch Fault Relay
Lim Limit
LOS Loss Of Signal
lps Liters Per Second
mA Milliamperes
mag Magnetizing
max Maximum
MCC Motor Control Center
Mg Milligram
Min Minimum, Minute
msec Millisecond(S)
Msl Mean Sea Level
MV Medium Voltage
mvlt Motor Voltage
MW Megawatt
NC Normally Closed
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
No Normally Open
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
NXG Next Generation Control
NXGII Next Generation Control II
NXGpro Next Generation Control pro
OLVC Open Loop Vector Control
O-M Overmodulation
OOS Out of Saturation (IGBT)
overld Overload
P Proportional (PID)
Pa Pascals
pb Push Button
PC Personal Computer or Printed Circuit
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PID Proportional Integral Derivative
List of abbreviations
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 307
Abbreviation Meaning
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PLL Phase Locked Loop
pot Potentiometer
pp Peak-to-peak
ppm Parts per Million
PPR Pulses per Revolution
PQM Power Quality Meter
ProToPSTM Process Tolerant Protection Strategy
PSDBP Power Spectral Density Break Point
psi Pounds Per Square Inch
pt Point
PT Potential Transformer
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
Q1,Q2,Q3,Q4 Output Transistor Designations
rad Radians
RAM Random Access Memory
ref Reference
rev Reverse, Revolution(S)
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RLBK Rollback
rms Root-mean-squared
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
RX Receive (RS232 Communications)
s Second(s)
SCB Signal Conditioning Board
SCR Silicon Controlled Rectifier
sec Second(s)
ser Serial
SMC Synchronous Motor Control
SOP Sum of Products; System Operating Program
spd Speed
stab Stability
std Standard
sw Switch
T1, T2 Output Terminals TI and T2
TB Terminal Block
TBD To Be Determined
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
TOL Thermal Overload
TP Test Point
List of abbreviations
NXGpro Communication
308 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Abbreviation Meaning
trq, τ Torque
TX Transmit (RS232 Communications)
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
V Voltage, Volts
VA Volt-Amperes
VAC Volts AC
var Variable
VDC Volts DC
vel Velocity (speed)
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
V/Hz Volts per Hertz
vlts Voltage(s), Volts
W Width, Watts
WAGO Expansion I/O System (brand name)
xfmr, xformer Transformer
List of abbreviations
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 309
List of abbreviations
NXGpro Communication
310 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Glossary
AND
AND is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if all of the inputs are true in SOP
notation, AND is represented as "∗" (e.g., C=A∗B), although sometimes it may be omitted
between operands with the AND operation being implied (e.g., C=AB).
ASCII
ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange, a set of 8-bit
computer codes used for the representation of text.
Baud rate
Baud rate is a measure of the switching speed of a line, representing the number of changes
of state of the line per second. The baud rate of the serial port is selected through the Baud Rate
parameter in the Communications Menu [9].
Bit
Bit is an acronym for BInary digiT. Typically, bits are used to indicate either a true (1) or false
(0) state within the drive’s programming.
Boolean algebra
A form of mathematical rules developed by the mathematician George Boole used in the design
of digital and logic systems.
Carrier frequency
Carrier frequency is the set switching frequency of the power devices (IGBTs) in the power
section of each cell. The carrier frequency is measured in cycles per second (Hz).
Catch a spinning load
"Catch a spinning load" is a feature that can be used with high-inertia loads (e.g., fans), in which
the drive may attempt to turn on while the motor is already turning. This feature can be enabled
via the control menu system.
CLVC
An acronym for Closed Loop Vector Control, one of the control modes in the drive. This is flux
vector control for an induction machine (IM), utilizing an encoder for speed feedback.
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 311
CMP
Refer to the glossary term SOP.
Comparator
A comparator is a device that compares 2 quantities and determines their equality. The
comparator submenus allow the programmer to specify two variables to be compared. The
results of the custom comparison operations can be used in the system program.
Configuration Update
see Tool Suite definition.
Converter
The converter is the component of the drive that changes AC voltage to DC voltage.
Critical speed avoidance
Critical speed avoidance is a feature that allows the operator to program up to 3 mechanical
system frequencies that the drive will "skip over" during its operation.
CSMC
An acronym for Closed Loop Synchronous Machine (SM) Control, one of the control modes of
the drive. This is a flux vector control for a synchronous machine, utilizing an encoder for speed
feedback and providing a field excitation command for use by an external field exciter.
DC link
The DC link is a large capacitor bank between the converter and inverter section of the drive.
The DC link, along with the converter, establishes the voltage source for the inverter.
De Morgan’s Theorem
The duality principal of Boolean algebra used to convert system logic equations into sum-ofproducts notation.
Debug Tool
see Tool Suite definition.
Downloading
Downloading is a process by which information is transmitted from a remote device (such as a
PC) to the drive. The term "downloading" implies the transmission of an entire file of information
(e.g., the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
312 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
devices. The use of a PC for downloading requires special serial communications software to
be available on the PC, which may link to the drive via RS232 or through the Host Simulator via
an ethernet connection.
DRCTRY
Directory file for system tokens and flags used in the compilation of system programs. It
provides a direct lookup table of ASCII names to internal ID numbers. It also identifies whether
the flag is a word or bit-field, and also whether it can be used as an input or output only, or can
be used for both.
Drive
The term "drive" refers to the power conversion equipment that converts utility power into power
for a motor in a controlled manner.
ELV
ELV is an acronym for extra low voltage, and represents any voltage not exceeding a limit that
is generally accepted to be 50 VAC and 120 VDC (ripple free).
EMC
EMC is an acronym for electromagnetic compatibility–the ability of equipment to function
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without introducing intolerable
electromagnetic disturbances to anything in that environment.
ESD
ESD is an acronym for ElectroStatic Discharge. ESD is an undesirable electrical side effect that
occurs when static charges build up on a surface and are discharged to another. When printed
circuit boards are involved, impaired operation and component damage are possible side
effects due to the static-sensitive nature of the PC board components. These side effects may
manifest themselves as intermittent problems or total component failures. It is important to
recognize that these effects are cumulative and may not be obvious.
Fault log
Fault messages are saved to memory so that the operator may view them at a later time. This
memory location is called the fault log. The fault log lists both fault and alarm messages, the
date and time that they occurred, and the time and date that they are reset.
Faults
Faults are error conditions that have occurred in the system. The severity of faults vary.
Likewise, the treatment or corrective action for a fault may vary from changing a parameter
value to replacing a hardware component such as a fuse.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 313
Flash Card
Non-volatile memory storage device for the control. It stores the drive program, system
program, logs, parameters, and other related drive files.
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array. An FPGA is an integrated circuit that contains thousands of
logic gates.
Function
A function is one of four components found in the menu system. Functions are built-in programs
that perform specific tasks. Examples of functions include System Program Upload/Download
and Display System Program Name.
Harmonics
Harmonics are undesirable AC currents or voltages at integer multiples of the fundamental
frequency. The fundamental frequency is the lowest frequency in the wave form (generally the
repetition frequency). Harmonics are present in any non-sinusoidal wave form and cannot
transfer power on average.
Harmonics arise from non-linear loads in which current is not strictly proportional to voltage.
Linear loads like resistors, capacitors, and inductors do not produce harmonics. However, nonlinear devices such as diodes and silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) do generate harmonic
currents. Harmonics are also found in uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs), rectifiers,
transformers, ballasts, welders, arc furnaces, and personal computers.
Hexadecimal digits
Hexadecimal (or "hex") digits are the "numerals" used to represent numbers in the base 16
(hex) number system. Unlike the more familiar decimal system, which uses the numerals 0
through 9 to make numbers in powers of 10, the base 16 number system uses the numerals 0,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F to make numbers in powers of 16.
Historic log
The historic log is a troubleshooting/diagnostic tool of the control. The historic log continuously
logs drive status, including the drive state, internal fault words, and multiple user-selectable
variables. This information is sampled every slow loop cycle of the control (typically 450 to 900
times per second). If a fault occurs, the log is frozen a predefined number of samples after the
fault event, and data samples prior to and after the fault condition are recorded to allow postfault analysis. The number of samples recorded are user-selectable via the control, as well as
the option to record the historic log within the VFD event log.
Host Simulator
see Tool Suite definition.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
314 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
I/O
I/O is an acronym for input/output. I/O refers to any and all inputs and outputs connected to a
computer system. Both inputs and outputs can be classified as analog (e.g., input power, drive
output, meter outputs, etc.) or digital (e.g., contact closures or switch inputs, relay outputs, etc.).
IGBT
IGBT is an acronym for Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors. IGBTs are semiconductors that are
used in the drive to provide reliable, high-speed switching, high-power capabilities, improved
control accuracy, and reduced motor noise.
Induction motor
An induction motor is an AC motor that produces torque by the reaction between a varying
magnetic field (generated in the stator) and the current induced in the coils of the rotor.
Intel hex
Intel hex refers to a file format in which records consist of ASCII format hexadecimal (base 16)
numbers with load address information and error checking embedded.
Inverter
The inverter is a portion of the drive that changes DC voltage into AC voltage. The term
"inverter" is sometimes used mistakenly to refer to the entire drive (the converter, DC link, and
inverter sections).
Jog mode
Jog mode is an operational mode that uses a pre-programmed jog speed when a digital input
(programmed as the jog mode input) is closed.
Jumpers
Jumper blocks are groups of pins that can control functions of the system, based on the state
of the jumpers. Jumpers (small, removable connectors) are either installed (on) or not installed
(off) to provide a hardware switch.
Ladder logic (Also Ladder Diagram)
A graphical representation of logic in which two vertical lines, representing power, flow from the
source on the left and the sink on the right, with logic branches running between, resembling
rungs of a ladder. Each branch consists of various labeled contacts placed in series and
connected to a single relay coil (or function block) on the right.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 315
Loss of signal feature
The loss of signal feature is a control scheme that gives the operator the ability to select one of
three possible actions in the event that the signal from an external sensor, configured to specify
the speed demand, is lost. Under this condition, the operator may program the drive (through
the system program) to (1) revert to a fixed, pre-programmed speed, (2) maintain the current
speed, or (3) perform a controlled (ramped) stop of the drive. By default, current speed is
maintained.
LVD
LVD is an acronym for Low Voltage Directive, a safety directive in the EU.
Lvl RH
This term refers the two security fields associated with each parameter of the system. These
fields allow the operator to individually customize specific security features for each menu
option (submenu, parameter, pick list, and function). These fields are shown in parameter
dumps and have the following meanings. Lvl is the term for the security level. Setting R=1
blocks parameter change, and setting H=1 hides the menu option from view until the
appropriate access level has been activated.
Memory
Memory is the working storage area for the drive that is a collection of RAM chips.
Microprocessor
A microprocessor is a central processing unit (CPU) that exists on a single silicon chip. The
microprocessor board is the printed circuit board on which the microprocessor is mounted. The
drive employs a single-board computer with a Pentium® microprocessor.
NEMA 1 and NEMA 12
NEMA 1 is an enclosure rating in which no openings allow penetration of a 0.25-inch diameter
rod. NEMA 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use only. NEMA 12 is a more stringent NEMA
rating in which the cabinet is said to be "dust tight" (although it is still not advisable to use NEMA
12 in conductive dust atmospheres). The approximate equivalent IEC rating is IP52.
Normally closed (NC)
Normally closed refers to the contact of a relay that is closed when the coil is de-energized.
Normally open (NO)
Normally open refers to the contact of a relay that is open when the coil is de-energized.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
316 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
OLTM
An acronym for Open Loop Test Mode, one of the control modes of the drive.
OLVC
An acronym for Open Loop Vector Control, also known as Encoderless Vector Control. OLVC
is a flux vector control that is one of the control modes of the drive. The drive computes the
rotational speed of the rotor and uses it for speed feedback.
OOS
OOS is an abbreviation for out of saturation - a type of fault condition in which a voltage drop
is detected across one of the IGBTs during conduction. This can indicate that the motor is
drawing current too rapidly or in excess.
OR
OR is a logical Boolean function whose output is true if any of the inputs is true. In SOP notation,
OR is represented as "+".
Parameter
A parameter is one of four items found in the menu system. Parameters are system attributes
that have corresponding values that can be monitored or, in some cases, changed by the user.
PED
PED is an acronym for pressure equipment directive, a directive of the EU relating to pressure
vessels.
Pick list
A pick list is one of four items found in the menu system. Pick lists are parameters that have a
finite list of pre-defined "values" from which to choose, rather than a value range used by
parameters.
PID
PID is an acronym for proportional + integral + derivative, a control scheme used to control
modulating equipment in such a way that the control output is based on (1) a proportional
amount of the error between the desired setpoint and the actual feedback value, (2) the
summation of this error over time, and (3) the change in error over time. Output contributions
from each of these three components are combined to create a single output response. The
amount of contribution from each component is programmable through gain parameters. By
optimizing these gain parameters, the operator can "tune" the PID control loop for maximum
efficiency, minimal overshoot, quick response time, and minimal cycling.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 317
Qualified user
A qualified user is a properly trained individual who is familiar with the construction and
operation of the equipment and the hazards involved.
RAM
RAM is an acronym for Random Access Memory, a temporary storage area for drive
information. The information in RAM is lost when power is no longer supplied to it. Therefore,
it is referred to as volatile memory.
Regeneration
Regeneration is the characteristic of an AC motor to act as a generator when the rotor’s
mechanical frequency is greater than the applied electrical frequency.
Relay
A relay is an electrically controlled device that causes electrical contacts to change their status.
Open contacts will close and closed contacts will open when rated voltage is applied to the coil
of a relay.
RS232C
RS232C is a serial communications standard of the Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
Set point
Set point is the desired or optimal speed of the VFD to maintain process levels (speed
command).
Slip
Slip is the difference between the stator electrical frequency of the motor and the rotor
mechanical frequency of the motor, normalized to the stator frequency as shown in the
following equation:
Slip = (ωS - ωR) / ωS
Slip compensation
Slip compensation is a method of increasing the speed reference to the speed regulator circuit
(based on the motor torque) to maintain motor speed as the load on the motor changes. The
slip compensation circuit increases the frequency at which the inverter section is controlled to
compensate for decreased speed due to load droop. For example, a motor with a full load
speed of 1760 rpm has a slip of 40 rpm. The no load rpm would be 1800 rpm. If the motor
nameplate current is 100 A, the drive is sending a 60 Hz wave form to the motor (fully loaded);
then the slip compensation circuit would cause the inverter to run 1.33 Hz faster to allow the
motor to operate at 1800 rpm, which is the synchronous speed of the motor.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
318 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
SMC
Is an acronym for Synchronous Motor Control, one of the control modes of the drive. This mode
computes the rotational speed similarly to open-loop vector control, and controls the field
reference or the synchronous motor as in closed-loop synchronous motor control.
SOP
(1) SOP is an acronym for Sum Of Products. The term "sum-of-products" comes from the
application of Boolean algebraic rules to produce a set of terms or conditions that are grouped
in a fashion that represents parallel paths (ORing) of required conditions that all must be met
(ANDing). This would be equivalent to branches of connected contacts on a relay logic ladder
that connect to a common relay coil. In fact, the notation can be used as a shortcut to describe
the ladder logic.
(2) SOP, when used as a filename extension, refers to System Operating Program.
SOP Utilities
The program within the Siemens Tool suite used for converting between text and machine
loadable code. It can also be used for uploading and downloading files over the RS232
connection.
See Tool Suite definition.
Speed Menu function
Speed menu is a feature of the menu system that allows the operator to directly access any of
the menus or parameters, rather than scrolling through menus to the appropriate item. This
feature uses the [Shift] button in conjunction with the right arrow. The user is prompted to enter
the four digit ID number associated with the desired menu or parameter.
Stop mode
Stop mode is used to shut down the drive in a controlled manner, regardless of its current state.
Submenus
A submenu is one of four components found in the menu system. Submenus are nested menus
(i.e., menus within other menus). Submenus are used to logically group menu items based on
similar functionality or use.
Synchronous speed
Synchronous speed refers to the speed of an AC induction motor’s rotating magnetic field. It is
determined by the frequency applied to the stator and the number of magnetic poles present in
each phase of the stator windings. Synchronous Speed equals 120 times the applied
Frequency (in Hz) divided by the number of poles per phase.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 319
System Operating Program
The functions of the programmable inputs and outputs are determined by the default system
program. These functions can be changed by modifying the appropriate setup menus from the
front keypad and display. I/O assignments can also be changed by editing the system program
(an ASCII text file with the extension .SOP), compiling it using the compiler program, and then
downloading it to the controller through its serial port, all by utilizing the SOP Utility Program
with the Siemens ToolSuite.
Tool Suite
Is the suite of programs developed by Siemens that allows easier access to the drive for
programming and monitoring. It is comprised of the following components:
● Tool Suite Launcher - also referred to as Tool Suite; used for coordinating other tools.
● SOP Utilities - used to launch an editor that compiles or reverse compiles a System
Program. It also allows for serial connection to the drive for uploading and downloading
System Programs.
● Configuration Update - allows for backing-up, updating, and cloning drives via direct access
to the Flash Disk.
● Host Simulator - used for monitoring, programming, and controlling a drive remotely from a
PC over the built-in ethernet port of the drive. Parameter changes, status display, and
graphing of internal variables are its main functions.
● Debug Tool - this tool is used to display the diagnostic screens of the drive for diagnosing
drive problems or improving performance via the built-in ethernet port of the drive.
Tool Suite Launcher
see Tool Suite definition.
Torque
The force that produces (or attempts to produce) rotation, as in the case of a motor.
Uploading
Uploading is a process by which information is transmitted from the drive to a remote device
such as a PC. The term uploading implies the transmission of an entire file of information (e.g.,
the system program) rather than continued interactive communications between the two
devices. The use of a PC for uploading requires communications software to be available on
the PC.
Variable frequency drive (VFD)
A VFD is a device that takes a fixed voltage and fixed frequency AC input source and converts
it to a variable voltage, variable frequency output that can control the speed of a motor.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
320 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
VHZ
Is an acronym for Volts per Hertz control, one of the control modes in the drive. This mode is
intended for multiple motors connected in parallel. Therefore, it disables spinning load and fast
bypass. This is essentially open-loop vector control with de-tuned (smaller bandwidth obtained
by reducing the gain) current regulators.
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 321
Glossary
NXGpro Communication
322 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
Index
A
abbreviations, 305
alarm, 272
Anybus ControlNet module, 204
connector, 204
MacID switches, 204
status indicators, 205
Anybus DeviceNet module, 178
cable length, 179
connector, 178
pin assignments, 178
status indicators, 179
termination resistor, 180
Anybus Modbus Ethernet module, 66, 101
status indicators, 67, 99, 102
Anybus Profibus DP-V1 IM module, 154
connector, 154
pin assignments, 154
rotary switches, 155
status indicators, 155
supported functions, 156
termination switch, 155
Anybus Profibus module, 128
connector, 128
pin assignments, 128
rotary switches, 129
status indicators, 129
termination switch, 129
Arcing, 26
Asynchronous motors, 23
Auxiliary power supply, 23
B
baud rate, 31, 127, 153, 177
bits
fixed register, 34, 49, 68, 83, 103, 118, 130, 144,
180, 195, 205, 219
general drive status, 51, 85, 119, 146, 197, 221
C
Cabling, 23
command
loop back test, 62
read coil, 57
read holding registers, 58, 93
write input register, 61, 95
write multiple coils, 60
write multiple input registers, 63, 96
Commissioning, 23
communication hardware, 17
communication network, 32
Communications Menu
Serial Port Setup Menu, 291
configuration
default, 49, 83, 117, 144, 173, 195, 219
non-default, 52, 86, 120, 147, 198, 222
control capabilities, 20
controller card, 17
ControlNet, 17, 203
network data, 206, 209
CPU board, 89, 122
D
data
monitoring, 50, 84, 118, 145, 196, 220
DeviceNet, 17, 177
network data, 181, 184
display
editing values, 290
display network monitor, 289
dual network, 20, 31, 65, 66, 101
requirement, 65, 127, 153, 177, 203
E
EDS file, 121, 199, 223
Electromagnetic fields, 29
electro smog, 29
Electrostatic discharge, 27
Electrostatic Protective Measures, 28
EMC-compliant installation, 23
ESD guidelines, 27
Ethernet port, 89, 122, 301
Ethernet /IP, 17
F
fault, 272
fault reset, 20
Five safety rules, 24
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 323
G
Grounding, 23
GSD file, 148, 173
I
Industrial network, 23
input, 20
programmable, 20
input bits
programming, 35, 68, 104, 130, 181, 206
Installation, 23
internal drive network, 301
manual IDs, 302
network parameters, 301
network registers, 301
SOP flags, 302
K
keypad, 21
L
Lock-out / Tag-out procedure, 25
M
master, 31, 57, 65, 93
microprocessor board, 66
Modbus, 18, 31
address, 35, 38, 68, 72
commands, 57, 93
Modbus Ethernet, 17, 65, 100
module, 17, 20
Anybus, 17
Anybus ControlNet, 204
Anybus DeviceNet, 178
Anybus Modbus Ethernet, 66
Anybus Profibus, 128
Anybus Profibus DP-V1 IM, 154
display type, 18
Siemens Modbus, 32
Multiplexer (MUX) data registers, 299
setup, 299
N
network
status, 54, 90, 122, 150, 175, 201, 225
network register
viewing values, 289
NXGpro Control, 17, 18, 21, 31, 57, 65, 93
O
output, 20
programmable, 20
output bits
programming, 36, 70, 105, 132, 182, 207
Output Data ID, 54, 62, 90, 96, 123, 149, 175, 200,
224, 263
cell status data, 284
cell temperature, 270
fault and alarm data, 271
general data, 264
internal digital inputs and outputs, 270
internal network data, 287
network output flags, 269
parallel drive data, 286
parameter read / write data, 285
performance data, 285
read register data, 284
serial flags, 269
shared memory data, 287
SilcoGraph data, 287
voltage/current data,
Wago input and output flags, 270
P
parameter
ID entry, 21
ID number, 21
keypad, 21
parameter read/write function, 293
parameters
comparators, 256
display network monitor, 289
external analog inputs, 254
external analog outputs, 254
from drive communication, 260
historic log variables, 257
internal analog outputs, 249
internal test points, 250
meter status variables, 257
Index
NXGpro Communication
324 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
network 1, 39, 73, 108, 135, 159, 186, 211
network 2, 41, 76, 110, 137, 160, 188, 212
pick list types, 233
to drive communication, 259
PFD register
defining, 294
setup, 293, 297
pick list values
comparators, 256
external analog inputs, 254
external analog outputs, 254
from drive communication, 260
internal analog outputs, 249
internal test points, 250
meter status variables, 257
to drive communication, 259
pick list variables
data from drive, 44, 77, 111, 138, 162, 189, 213
data to drive, 47, 81, 115, 142, 165, 193, 217
PLC, 31, 293
Profibus, 17, 127
network data, 130, 134
ProfiDrive, 17, 153
parameters, 171
signal description, 169
telegram, 157, 167
protocol, 17
ControlNet, 17, 203
DeviceNet, 17, 177
Modbus, 18, 31
Modbus Ethernet, 17, 65, 100
Profibus, 17, 127
ProfiDrive, 17, 153
PTD register
defining, 295
setup, 293, 297
Pulse Timeout
setup, 55, 91
R
Remote Terminal Unit, 31, 65
reverse speed demand, 20
RJ-45 port, 87
RS232 port, 20
run request, 20
S
serial interface, 31
serial port, 53
setup
example, 55, 91, 123, 150, 201, 225
network, 53, 89, 122, 148, 174, 199, 223
parameters, 53, 89, 122, 148, 174, 199, 223
Shielding, 23
Siemens Modbus module, 31, 32
configuration, 31
connector, 33
status indicators, 34
termination resistor, 34
SINAMICS PERFECT HARMONY GH180 drive, 17
slave, 31, 57, 65, 93
SOP, 54, 90, 123, 149, 200, 224, 271
drive control, 54, 90, 149, 200, 224
file, 52, 87, 120, 147, 198, 222
flag, 54, 90, 122, 149, 150, 175, 200, 201, 224,
225
speed setting
enable from network, 52, 87, 120, 147, 198, 222
sending to drive, 52, 86, 120, 147, 198, 222
stop, 20
stop request, 20
symbols, 305
Synchronous motors, 23
T
TCP/IP, 65
ToolSuite, 21
Transport, 23
V
Variable-Speed Drives, 23
Index
NXGpro Communication
Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A 325
Index
NXGpro Communication
326 Function Manual, AD, A5E33486415A
)XUWKHU,QIRUPDWLRQ ZZZVLHPHQVFRPGULYHV
6LHPHQV,QGXVWU\,QF
3'/'
+XQW9DOOH\5RDG
1HZ.HQVLQJWRQ3$
8QLWHG6WDWHVRI$PHULFD
Previous : Robicon Perfect Harmony Siemens A1A10000350.00M Rev Be Pcb Circuit Board PCA, W/Firmware, Modulator
Next : Siemens Perfect Harmony MV Drives ASI Robicon Circuit Control Board PCA Firmware A1A363818.00M REV
Copy product links
Long by picture save/share
INQUIRY
Add Successfully
We are the world's leading supplier of spare parts for medium voltage drives of various brands
点击右上角
分享给朋友吧
GET IN TOUCH
East Sun Industrial Centre, No 16 Shing Yip Street Kl, Hongkong
Call us : +852 5261 7322
Email us : [email protected]
SITEMAP
BUSINESS HOURS
Monday to Friday : 9 am to 6 pm
Saturday : 9 am to 12 am
Sunday : Closed Support Hours in 24/7 Everyday
DISCLAIMER:
We are not an authorized distributor, reseller or representative of the following products presented on this website. All Product names and logos throughout this site are trademarks of their respective holders. Use of them DOES NOT imply any affiliation with or endorsement by them.
© 2020 robiconperfectharmony.com site . All rights reserved Site Map
